Skip to main content

Full text of "An introduction to Latin syntax"

See other formats


;co 


.CD 


-co 


I 


m 


AN     INTRODUCTION 


TO 


LATIN    SYNTAX 


GIBSON 


HENRY    FROWDE 


OXFORD  UNIVERSITY  PRESS  WAREHOUSE 
AMEN  CORNER,  E.G. 


Series 


AN    INTRODUCTION 


TO 


L AT  IN     SYNTAX 


BY 


W.    S.    GIBSON,    M.A, 

Late  Exhibitioner  of  Balliol  College 


Ojrfori 

AT    THE    CLARENDON     PRESS 
M  DCCC  LXXXVIII 

rights  resei~ved~\ 


PREFACE. 

THIS  little  book  is  an  attempt,  based  on  the  experience  of 
several  years,  first  as  assistant  master  at  a  public  school,  and 
then  as  the  master  of  a  preparatory  school,  to  present  Latin 
syntax  in  such  a  way  as  to  require  less  supplementing  by 
oral  explanation  than  is  necessary  with  an  ordinary  memorial 
syntax  (though  for  many  boys  this  oral  explanation  can 
never  be  entirely  dispensed  with),  and  to  make  it  impossible 
for  any  boy  to  learn  the  rules  as  mere  forms  of  words, 
without  any  attempt  at  -understanding  them.  Instead  of 
beginning  with  an  abstract  (and  therefore,  to  most  boys, 
meaningless)  rule  to  be  learned,  each  Section  begins  with 
a  Latin  sentence  or  sentences  illustrative  of  the  rule  which 
is  to  be  explained.  The  master  should  see  that  the  pupil 
is  able  to  translate  these  sentences  word  for  word,  and  to 
parse  every  word  in  them.  When  he  can  do  this,  he  will  be 
in  a  position  to  understand  the  analysis  of  the  sentences 
which  follows,  leading  him  up  by  a  kind  of  induction  to  the 
rule,  which  is  thus  only  presented  to  him  when  he  is  able  to 
recognise  its  truth.  The  sentences  are  for  the  most  part 
taken  from  the  examples  in  the  Public  Schools  Primer, 
though  I  have  sometimes  taken  others  which  seemed  to  me 
better  adapted  to  illustrate  the  particular  rules  under  con- 
sideration, and  in  a  few  instances,  where  I  could  not  find  a 


VI  PREFACE. 

perfectly  suitable  example  to  hand,  I  have  framed  one  to 
suit  my  requirements. 

As  regards  arrangement,  I  have  on  the  whole  followed  the 
lines  of  the  Public  Schools  Primer,  though  I  have  not 
hesitated  to  depart  from  the  order  there  observed,  where  it 
seemed  to  me  that  greater  clearness  would  be  attained  by 
so  doing.  Such  departures  occur  chiefly  in  the  treatment  of 
the  ablative  and  of  the  genitive.  There  is  also  an  important 
one  in  Chapter  II,  Section  4,  where,  after  the  explanation  of 
the  accusative  with  infinitive,  is  introduced  that  of  the  mood 
and  tense  in  a  subordinate  clause  depending  on  an  accusative 
with  infinitive.  It  would  be  absurd  for  a  boy  to  work  all 
through  the  rules  on  the  several  cases,  and  those  on  the 
infinitive,  gerunds,  supines,  and  gerundive,  before  he  had 
any  practice  in  the  commonest  use  of  the  subjunctive ;  and 
this  seemed  the  most  natural  place  to  introduce  it. 

Each  Section  concludes  with  one  or  more  exercises,  to 
test  the  pupil's  power  of  applying  the  rule  which  has  just 
been  arrived  at.  In  the  framing  of  these  exercises  great  care 
has  been  taken  to  illustrate  the  rules  previously  treated  as 
well  as  those  immediately  under  consideration,  so  that  the 
pupil  may  by  constant  repetition  be  kept  from  forgetting 
what  he  has  once  learned. 

It  is  a  common  complaint  among  schoolmasters  that  the 
exercise  books  do  not  give  enough  practice  on  each  rule.  I 
have  tried  to  meet  this  want  by  often  giving  two  exercises  to 
a  Section,  and  ending  each  Chapter  with  three,  which  are 
intended  to  serve  as  a  kind  of  recapitulation  of  the  contents 
of  the  whole  Chapter.  For  some  boys,  no  doubt,  a  smaller 


PREFACE.  vii 

number  of  exercises  would  be  sufficient ;  but  an  exercise  can 
always  be  missed  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher. 

A  word  or  two  may  be  necessary  with  regard  to  one  or 
two  departures  from  the  ordinary  practice  in  the  use  of 
grammatical  terms.  The  term  '  subject '  is,  in  most  Gram- 
mars, 'used  indifferently  for  the  thing  spoken  of  and  for 
the  name  denoting  this  thing.  The  same  remark  applies, 
mutatis  mutandis,  to  the  term  '  object.'  This  ambiguous 
use  of  terms,  however  high  the  authority  for  it,  surely 
ministers  to  that  confusion  between  words  and  things  which 
is  so  common  in  the  minds  of  the  young,  but  from  which 
it  is  a  part  of  the  teacher's  business  to  deliver  them.  The 
terms  'subject'  and  'object'  are  in  this  book  used  only  to 
signify  things ;  for  the  names  denoting  the  things  I  have 
ventured  to  introduce  the  terms  *  subject  noun '  and  '  object 
noun/  This  necessitates  a  slight  extension  of  the  meaning 
of  the  word  '  noun '  beyond  its  ordinary  use,  so  as  to  make 
it  include  substantival  pronouns.  It  does  not,  however, 
imply  the  disuse  of  the  term  '  pronoun,'  which  may  still  be 
used  to  denote  such  words  as  stand  in  the  place  of  nouns, 
though  these  are  no  longer  regarded  as  forming  a  separate 
part  of  speech,  but  only  as  a  subdivision  of  the  class  of 
nouns.  With  regard  to  the  so-called  '  adjectival  pronouns/ 
I  have  followed  the  French  practice  of  calling  them  adjectives. 
This  is  surely  more  logical  and  less  confusing  than  to  class 
together  words  of  such  different  functions  as  '  I '  and  '  my/ 
and  raise  the  class  so  formed  to  the  rank  of  a  (quite  un- 
necessary) part  of  speech. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  plan  of  giving  a  separate  Vocabulary 


VI 11  PREFACE. 

for  each  part  of  speech  may  have  the  effect  of  obliging  the 
pupil  to  think  before  looking  out  a  word,  and  so  tend  to 
eliminate  one  fruitful  source  of  mistakes,  the  habit  of  taking 
the  first  Latin  equivalent  found  for  an  English  word  (which 
may  have  half  a  dozen  different  meanings),  and  spare  a  few 
teachers'  ears  the  too  familiar  answer  in  justification  of  a 
blunder,  '  Please,  Sir  !  I  found  it  in  the  Dictionary/ 


THE  ROOKERY,  HEADINGTON, 
OXFORD. 


CHAPTER    I. 
ON  AGREEMENT. 


SECTION  1.  On  the  agreement  of  a  noun  with  another 
noun,  with  which  it  is  in  apposition. 

[Note. — No  exercises  are  given  on  the  agreement  of  the  verb  or  ad- 
jective with  a  single  noun,  as  it  is  assumed  that  the  pupil  will  have  been 
thoroughly  practised  in  these  while  learning  the  accidence  of  verbs  and 
adjectives.] 

Let  the  following  sentence  be  learned,  and  each  word  in  it 
parsed : 

Nos  pueri  patrem  Lollium  imitabimur. 
We  boys  will  imitate  our  father  Lollius. 

In  this  sentence  the  noun  '  pueri '  is  added  to  the  noun  * 
'  nos '  to  explain  it  more  fully,  and  the  two  nouns  denote, 
or  are  names  of,  the  same  persons.  Notice  that  '  pueri '  is  in 
the  same  case  with  '  nos/ 

So  also  'Lollium'  is  added  to  explain  'patrem/  and 
denotes  the  same  person  that  is  denoted  by  this  noun. 
Notice  again  that  'Lollium'  is  in  the  same  case  with 
1  patrem.' 


1  The  word  '  noun '  is  used  throughout  this  book  to  include  sub- 
.stantival  pronouns,  '  adjective  '  to  include  adjectival  pronouns  and  par- 
'ticiples. 


2  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

A  noun  thus  added  to  another  noun  to  explain  it,  and  de- 
noting the  same  thing  as  the  noun  which  it  explains,  is  said 
to  be  in  apposition  with  that  noun1.  As  we  have  seen,  it 
must  be  in  the  same  case  with  the  noun  with  which  it  is  in 
apposition. 

Exercise  1. 

1 .  The  master  is  teaching  two  boys,  the  sons  of  Caius. 

2.  Who  will  dare  to  say  such  things*  about  you,  the  de- 
liverers of  your  country  ? 

3.  I  shall  give  all  these  books  to  my  son  Caius. 

4.  Tarquinius  Superbus,  the  son  of  Priscus,  had  married 
the  daughter  of  king  Servius  Tullius. 

5.  India  has  two  very  large  rivers,  the  Indus  and   the 
Ganges. 

6.  The  Tarentines  sought  aid  against  the  Romans  from 
Pyrrhus,  king  of  Epirus. 

7.  The  Samnites  had  come  into  Campania,  the  most  fertile 
district  of  Italy. 

8.  The  Helvetii  used  to  dwell  between  Mount  Jura  and 
the  river  Rhone. 

9.  He  will  refuse  this  even  to  you,  his 3  dearest  friend. 

10.  Alcibiades  was  a  pupil  of  Socrates,  the  wisest  of  the 
Greeks. 

1  Unless  it  is  put  in  to  show  who  is  being  addressed,  in  which  case  it 
is  of  course  a  vocative. 

2  When  the  word  'thing'  has   an   adjective   qualifying  it,  it  may 
generally  be  left  out   in   turning  into   Latin,  if  it  is  in  the  nomina- 
tive or  accusative,  and  the  adjective  must  then  be  put  in  the  neuter 
gender. 

3  A  possessive  adjective  should  generally  be  left  out  in  turning  into 
Latin,  if  the  meaning  is  quite  clear  without  it.     Here  there  can  be  no 
doubt  whose  friend  is  meant,  therefore  '  his '  may  be  left  out. 


ON  AGREEMENT.  3 

SECTION  2.  On  the  agreement  of  a  relative  with  its 
antecedent. 

Let  the  following  sentences  be  learned,  and  the  words  in 
them  parsed : 

1.  Mortuus  est  Cains,  quern  omnes  amavimus. 
Cams,  whom  we  all  loved,  is  dead. 

2.  Amo  te,  mater,  quae  me  amas. 
/  love  you,  mother,  who  love  me. 

To  find  the  word  that  a  relative  pronoun  refers  to,  or 
stands  for,  turn  the  relative  clause  into  a  question,  and  see 
what  word  must  be  used  instead  of  the  relative  pronoun  in  the 
answer. 

For  instance,  to  find  the  word  that  'whom,'  in  Sent,  i, 
refers  to,  ask  the  question  '  Whom  did  we  all  love  ? '  Ans.1 
'  We  all  loved  Caius.'  '  Caius '  is  the  word  that  '  whom ' 
refers  to,  and  is  called  the  antecedent. 

In  this  answer  '  Caius '  is  the  object  noun.  Therefore, 
as  the  word  '  whom '  in  the  relative  clause  stands  for  '  Caius,' 
it  denotes  the  object,  and  this  explains  why  '  quern '  is  in  the 
accusative. 

Now,  as  '  quern '  stands  for  '  Caium,'  it  is  of  course  in  the 
same  gender  and  number  as  that  word,  i.  e.  masc.  sing. 

To  find  the  antecedent  in  Sentence  2,  ask  the  question 
'  Who  loves  me  ? '  Ans.  '  You  love  me.'  '  You '  is  the  ante- 
cedent, and  the  relative  pronoun  '  quae '  is  in  the  same  gender 
and  number  as  '  te,'  i.  e.  (as  it  is  a  woman  that  is  addressed) 
fern.  sing. 


1  In  making  the  answer  to  the  question,  it  is  necessary  to  repeat  the 
verb,  or  the  reason  for  the  case  of  the  relative  pronoun  will  not  be  made 
clear. 

B  2 


4  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

In  this  answer  *  you '  is  the  subject  noun.  Therefore,  as 
the  word  'who'  in  the  relative  clause  stands  for  'you/  it 
denotes  the  subject,  and  this  is  why  '  quae '  is  in  the  nomina- 
tive. Further,  as  the  relative  pronoun  '  quae,'  which  denotes 
the  subject,  stands  for  '  tu/  the  verb  '  amas '  is  in  the  2nd 
person  singular,  to  agree  with  its  subject  noun. 

We  see,  then,  that  a  relative  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in 
gender,  number^  and  person,  but  in  case  belongs  to  its  own 
clause. 

Notice  that  it  is  only  when  the  relative  denotes  the  subject 
of  its  clause  that  it  affects  the  person  of  the  verb. 

Exercise  2. 

1.  This  man  *  has  a  maidservant,  who  was  taken  in  that  city. 

2.  Are  you  not*  willing  to  give  this  to  me,  your  friend, 
who  have  preserved  you  ? 

3.  The  Romans  besieged  the  towns  of  the  Latins,  whom 
they  had  defeated  at  Mount  Vesuvius. 

4.  We  are  willing  to  do  anything*  for*  you,  who  have 
preserved  us. 

5.  Let  us  finish  the  work,  which  we  have  undertaken. 

6.  The    legions,    which   the    Romans    had    sent   against 
Hannibal,  were  routed  at  the  river  Trebia. 

7.  The  Romans  made  an  alliance  with  the  Campanians, 
whose  city,  Capua,  the  Samnites  were  besieging. 


1  When  the  word  '  man '  has  an  adjective  qualifying  it,  it  may  gene- 
rally be  left  out  in  turning  into  Latin,  the  adjective  of  course  being  put 
in  the  masculine  gender. 

2  '  Not '  in  a  question  should  generally  be  translated  by  '  nonne.' 

3  Quidvis.  4  Pro. 


ON  AGREEMENT.  5 

8.  Never  shall  the  enemy'*-  conquer  us,  who  are  righting  on 
behalf  of  our  country. 

9.  The  citizens  will  be  walling  to  do  2  anything  zfor  you, 
soldiers,  who  have  saved  the  city. 

10.  The  Romans  sent  two  armies  against  the  Samnites, 
who  had  invaded  Campania. 

Exercise  3. 

1.  I  cannot  entrust  this  to  you,  who  have  always  been  my 
enemy  4. 

2.  The  Albans  dismissed  the  ambassador,  who  had  come 
from  king  Tullus. 

3.  He  is  despised  by  those  whom  he  fears. 

4.  What  rewards  will  be  given  to  us,  who  have  saved  the 
state  ? 

5.  This  boy  hates  even  me,  who  love  him. 

6.  The  defeat,  which  the  army  had   received,  was   an- 
nounced to  Caius,  the  praefect  of  the  city. 

7.  We  will  follow  you,  tribunes,  -who  are  leading  us  against 
the  enemy 5. 

8.  Tarquinius  Superbus  killed  king  Servius  Tullus,  whose 
daughter  Tullia  he  had  married. 

9.  Let  us  pay 6  honour  to  the  women,  who  died/0r 7  their 
country. 

10.  The    Aegean    sea,    which    separates    Greece    from 
Asia,  contains  the  islands  Lesbos,  Samos,   and  very  many 
others. 


1  Hostes,  plur.    This  word  always  signifies  an  enemy  of  one's  country. 

2  Quidvis.  3  Pro. 

4  Inimicus  (a  personal  enemy).  5  See  n.  i. 

*  Tribu-o,  -ere,  -i,  tributum.  7  Pro. 


6  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

SECTION  3.  On  the  agreement  of  a  verb  or  adjective 
with  two  or  more  nouns. 

Sentences  to  be  learned : 

1.  Si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero'*-  valemus. 

If  you  and  Tullia  are  well,  Cicero  and  I *  are  well. 

2.  Pater  mihi  et  mater  mortui  sunt. 
My  father  and  mother  are  dead. 

3.  Labor  voluptasque  natura  dissimillima  sunt. 
Toil  and  pleasure  are  by  nature  very  different. 

In  each  of  these  sentences  the  subject  is  denoted  by  two 
nouns  in  the  nominative  case  coupled  together.  When  this 
is  the  case,  the  verb  is  in  the  plural,  in  Latin  as  in  English, 
even  though  each  of  the  nouns  denoting  the  subject  may  be 
in  the  singular. 

In  Sentence  i  the  subject  of  '  valetis '  is  denoted  by  a  pro- 
noun of  the  2nd  person  '  tu/  and  a  noun, '  Tullia/  of  the  3rd 
person,  coupled  together.  Notice  that  the  verb  is  in  the  2nd 
person,  not  the  3rd.  So  also  the  subject  of  'valemus'  is 
denoted  by  a  pronoun  of  the  ist  person,  '  ego/  and  a  noun, 
'  Cicero/  of  the  3rd  person,  coupled  together.  Notice  that 
the  verb  is  in  the  ist  person,  not  the  3rd. 

In  Sentence  2,  where  the  subject  is  denoted  by  two  nouns 
of  the  3rd  person  coupled  together,  the  verb  is,  of  course, 
in  the  3rd  person  too. 

The  rule,  then,  is  that,  when  the  nouns  denoting  the  sub- 
ject are  of  different  persons,  the  verb  agrees  with  the  ist  person 
rather  than  the  2nd  or  %rd,  and  with  the  2nd  rather  than  the 

yd. 

In  Sentence  2  the  nouns  denoting  the  subject  are  a  mas- 

1  Notice  that  in  Latin  the  first  person  is  put  before  the  second  or 
third,  in  English  we  generally  use  the  reverse  order. 


ON  AGREEMENT.  7 

culine, '  pater/  and  a  feminine,  '  mater/  each  denoting  a  living 
being.  Notice  that  the  adjective  '  mortui '  is  in  the  masculine 
gender,  not  the  feminine. 

In  Sentence  3  the  nouns  denoting  the  subject  are  a  mas- 
culine, '  labor/  and  a  feminine,  '  voluptas/  each  denoting  a 
lifeless  thing.  Here  the  adjective  '  dissimillima '  is  in  the 
neuter  gender. 

The  rule,  then,  is  that,  when  an  adjective  qualifies  two  or 
more  nouns  of  different  genders^  it  agrees  with  the  masculine 
rather  than  the  feminine,  if  the  nouns  denote  living  beings  ;  but 
is  generally  put  in  the  neuter,  if  the  nouns  denote  lifeless  things. 

The  same  rules  of  course  apply  to  the  person  and  gender 
of  a  relative  pronoun,  when  the  antecedent  consists  of  two  or 
more  nouns  coupled  together. 

Exercise  4. 

1.  Your  father  and  I  were  taught  by1  the  same  master, 
Orbilius*. 

2.  My  legions  and  I  have  routed  the  enemy. 

3.  You  and  your  legions  were  routed  by  the  enemy,  whom 
you  had  provoked  to 3  battle. 

4.  Trees  and  walls  were  thrown  down  in  that  storm,  which 
you  had  predicted. 

5.  We  are  mourning  for*  Caius  and  his  wife  Tullia,  who 
were  killed  by  the  soldiers. 

6.  You  and  I  were  sitting  by  the  river,  which  flows  past 
our  garden. 

7.  The  women  and  children 5,  whom  we  took  in  the  city, 
have  been  set  free 6. 

1  Ab,  used  with  a  pass,  verb  to  show  the  person  by  whom  something 
is  done.  2  Orbilius  is  the  master's  name. 

3  Ad.  *  Lugeo,  I  mourn  for,  trans. 

5  Pueri.  6  Liber-o,  -are,  I  set  free. 


8  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

8.  You  and  your  horsemen  will  go  to  the  right  wing ;  my 
lieutenant  and  I  will  remain  here. 

9.  P.  Decius  Mus  and  T.  Manlius  Torquatus,  whom  the 
Romans  had  sent  against  the  Latins,  drew  up l  their  army  by 
Mount  Vesuvius. 

10.  Successes 2,  honours,  victories,  have  been  denied  to  me 
by  the  gods. 

Exercise  5. 

1.  My  wife  and  son  were  left  in  the  city. 

2.  We  are  fighting  for  our  altars  and  hearths,  which  we 
will  never  yield  up 3  to  the  enemy. 

3.  These  things  were  said  to  your  brother  Quintus  and 
me,  who  were  then  standing  by 4. 

4.  We  and  our  allies  will  soon  put  to  flight 5  the  savage 
multitude,  which  has  invaded  our  territory. 

5.  The  king  and  his  legions  had  not  yet  set  out. 

6.  All  men  are  praising  you  and  your  wife  Cornelia,  who 
have  saved  the  city. 

7.  You  and  I  were  rejoicing  because  the  general  and  the 
army  had  returned  unharmed. 

8.  The  state  has  lost  an  excellent  citizen,  Hirtius,  whose 
death  we  are  all  mourning. 

9.  If  you  and  your  children  are  in  good  health*,  it  is  well ; 
my  wife  and  I  are  in  good  health. 

10.  The  shields  and  spears,  which  we  had  taken  from  the 
enemy,  were  hung  up 7  in  the  temples. 


1  Instru-o,  -£re,  -xi,  -ctum.  2  Res  secundae. 

3  Trad-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itunu  4  Adst-o,  -are,  I  stand  by. 

5  Fug-o,  -are,  I  put  to  flight.  6  Valeo,  I  am  in  good  health. 

7  Suspen-do,  -dere,  -di,  -sum. 


ON  AGREEMENT.  .  9 

Exercise  6. 

1 .  You  and  your  sister  were  walking  near  the  river  Tiber. 

2.  The  consul  and  one  legion  had  been  put  to  flight'*  by  the 
enemy. 

3.  Our  houses  and  lands,  which  we  had  left  unoccupied, 
were  spoiled  by  the  enemy. 

4.  The  houses  and  temples  were  set  on  fire"-  by  the  enemy, 
who  had  broken  3  into  the  city. 

5.  My  brother  and  I  have  been  praised  by  Caius,  a  tribune 
of  the  soldiers. 

6.  You  and  I  were  fighting  on 4  the  walls,  which  the  enemy 
were  assailing. 

7.  The  king  has  promised  a  reward  to  you  and  your  son, 
who  were  wounded  in  that  battle. 

8.  Your  mother  and  I  were  born  in  this  house. 

9.  Our  houses  and  goods  were  entrusted  to  the  protection 
of  Servilius,  the  master  of  the  horse 5. 

10.  You  and  I  have  seen  the  destruction  6  which  was  caused'1 
by  the  enemy. 


1  See  Ex.  5,  n.  5.  3  Incen-do,  -dere,  -di,  -sum,  I  set  on  fire. 

3  Ir-rump-o,  -ere,  -rup-i,  -turn.  4  In. 

5  Magister  equitum.       6  Strag-es,  -is.       •  Fac-io,  -ere,  feci,  factum. 


CHAPTER   II. 

ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE  AND  ON  COPULATIVE 
VERBS. 

SECTION  1.  On  the  accusative  with  infinitive,  depend- 
ing on  a  verb  in  a  primary  tense. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Scimus  annos  fugere. 
We  know  that  years  flee. 

2.  Dicit  se  peccavisse. 

He  says  that  he  has  sinned. 

3.  Promittit  se  iturum  esse. 
He  promises  that  he  will  go. 

In  all  these  sentences  the  principal  verb  expresses  either 
belief  of  a  fact  (as  in  Sentence  i,  'We  know'),  or  a  statement 
of  a  fact  (as  in  Sentence  2,  '  He  says/  and  Sentence  3,  'He 
promises').  Such  verbs  may  in  English  be  followed  by  a 
clause  introduced  by  the  conjunction  '  that.'  In  turning  into 
Latin  the  word  'that'  must  be  left  out,  and  the  verb  of 
the  clause  introduced  by  it  must  be  put  in  the  infinitive, 
with  its  subject  noun  in  the  accusative. 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE    WITH  INFINITIVE.        11 

Exercise  1 . 

1.  He  says1  that  the  soldiers  did  not1-  fear  death. 

2.  I  hope  that  your  father  and  mother  will  soon  come. 

3.  It  is  announced  that  the  enemy  have  been  conquered. 

4.  He  hopes  that  the  enemy  will  be  conquered. 

5.  They  say  that  the  enemy's  cavalry  is  approaching. 

6.  I  think  that  the  plunder  will  be  given  to  the  soldiers. 

7.  I  feel  that  I  am  being  justly  punished. 

8.  I  do  not  think  that  Caesar  was  justly  killed. 

9.  We  shall  soon  hear 2  that  the  camp  is  being  taken. 

10.  The  general  has  promised  that  we  shall  receive  large 
rewards. 

1 1.  I  know  that  the  enemy  have  broken*  into  the  camp. 

12.  The   general  believes  that  the   sentinels  are  keeping 
watch 4  before  the  gates. 


SECTION  2.     On  the  case  of  the  complement  of  a  copu- 
lative verb. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Nemo  nascitur  sapiens. 
Nobody  is  born  wise. 

2.  Constat  neminem  nasci  sapientem. 
//  is  agreed  that  nobody  is  born  wise. 

1  When  there  is  a  '  not '  in  a  clause  introduced  by  '  that '  depending 
on  the  verb  '  say,'  use  '  neg-o '  (-are),  I  deny,  for  the  principal  verb,  and 
leave  out  the  '  not.' 

2  This  is  a  verb  expressing  a  statement  of  a  fact,  as  it  implies  that 
some  one  will  say  that  which  we  shall  hear. 

3  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  6,  n.  3. 

*  Excub-o,  -are,  I  keep  watch. 


13  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

In  these  sentences  it  is  clear  that  the  word  '  wise ' — or 
some  other  word — is  necessary  to  complete  the  meaning  of 
the  verb  '  is  born/  as  it  would  be  absurd  to  say  '  Nobody  is 
born.'  It  is  equally  clear  that  the  verb  does  not  express  an 
action  done  to  any  person  or  thing,  and  is  therefore  not  a 
transitive  verb.  It  is  therefore  a  copulative  verb,  and  the 
word  'wise,'  which  completes  its  meaning,  is  the  comple- 
ment 

Notice  that  the  complement  of  a  copulative  verb  is  in  the  same 
case  as  its  subject  noun,  whether  that  noun  is  in  the  nomina- 
tive, as  in  Sentence  i,  or  in  the  accusative,  as  in  Sentence  2. 
If  the  complement  is  an  adjective,  it  will  of  course  agree 
with  the  subject  noun  in  gender  and  number  also. 

Exercise  2. 

1.  The    leader,   whom    we    are    following,    seems    most 
cautious. 

2.  Your   father   will    perceive    that    you   are   becoming 
learned. 

3.  Even  those  who  were  born  deaf  and  dumb,  may1  learn 
much 2. 

4.  It  is  agreed  that  Camillus  was  a  very  great*  general. 

5.  These  things  were  unknown  to  you  and  me,  who  were 
then  boys. 

6.  Do   you  not*   know  that  my  brother  and  I  shall  be 
fellow-soldiers  ? 

7.  You  and  your  brother,  who  had  seemed  unfriendly  to 
us,  turned  out5  most  friendly. 


1  Possum.  2  Say  '  many  things.'  s  Summus. 

4  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  2,  n.  2. 

5  E-vad-o,  -ere,  -vas-i,  -urn,  I  turn  out,  i.e.  prove  to  be. 


ON  THE   ACCUSATIVE    WITH  INFINITIVE.        13 

8.  All  will  confess  that  you  have   turned  out1  a  skilful 
leader. 

9.  We  are  fighting  for  our  wives  and  children,  who,  if  we 
are  conquered*,  will  become  the  prey  of  the  enemy. 

10.  It  is  agreed  that  nobody  ever  becomes  suddenly  very 
base. 

11.  I  think  that  this  surrender  will  seem  most  disgraceful. 


SECTION  3.  On  the  accusative  with  infinitive  depend- 
ing on  a  verb  in  a  historic  tense. 

In  the  last  two  exercises,  wherever  we  have  had  an  accu- 
sative with  infinitive,  the  verb  on  which  it  depended  has  been 
in  a  primary  tense.  Now  let  the  following  sentences  be 
learned,  in  which  the  accusative  with  infinitive  depends  on 
a  verb  in  a  historic  tense : 

1.  Scivimus  annos  fugere. 

We  knezv  that  the  years  were  flying . 

2.  Dixit  se  peccavisse. 

He  said  that  he  had  sinned. 

3.  Promisit  se  iturum  esse. 

He  promised  that  he  would  go. 

Notice  that  the  present  infinitive  'fugere/  in  Sentence  i,  is 
translated  as  a  past  imperfect,  the  past  infinitive  '  peccavisse,' 
in  Sentence  2,  as  a  pluperfect,  and  the  future  infinitive  '  iturum 
esse/  in  Sentence  3,  by  the  words  '  would  go.' 

In  Latin,  'fugere'  is  in  the  present  tense,  because  the 
action  expressed  by  it  was  present  at  the  time  referred  to  by 
the  principal  verb  '  scivimus.' 

1  See  n.  5,  p   12.  a  Say  '  shall  have  been  conquered.' 


14  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

'  Peccavisse '  is  in  the  past  tense,  because  the  action  ex- 
pressed by  it  was  past  at  the  time  referred  to  by  the  principal 
verb  'dixit.' 

'  Itunim  esse  '  is  in  the  future  tense,  because  the  action 
expressed  by  it  was  future  at  the  time  referred  to  by  the 
principal  verb  '  promisit.' 

To  see,  then,  what  tense  of  the  infinitive  should  be  used, 
where  the  accusative  with  infinitive  depends  on  a  verb  in 
a  historic  tense,  think  what  tense  would  have  been  used  by 
the  person  himself  about  whom  the  principal  verb  tells  you. 

Thus: 

'  We  knew  that  the  years  were  flying '  implies  that  we  said 
to  ourselves  '  The  years  are  flying.'  Therefore  '  fugere '  is 
in  the  present  infinitive. 

'He  said  that  he  had  sinned'  =  'He  said  "  I  have  sinned"  ' 
Therefore  '  peccavisse '  is  in  the  past  infinitive. 

'He  promised  that  he  would  go'  implies  that  he  said 
'  I  will  go.'  Therefore  '  iturum  esse '  is  in  the  future  in- 
finitive. 

Remember  that  there  are  only  three  distinctions  of  tense 
in  the  infinitive,  and  that,  if  any  past  tense  would  have 
been  used  by  the  person  speaking,  the  past  infinitive  must 
be  used. 

Exercise  3. 

i.  He  pretended  that  he1  saw  through*  the  plans  of  the 
conspirators. 

1  In  a  clause  depending  on  a  verb  expressing  a  belief  or  statement  of 
a  fact,  the  personal  pronouns  '  he,'  '  she,'  '  it,'  '  they,'  must  be  translated 
by  '  se,'  and  the  possessive  adjectives,  '  his,'  'her/  '  its,'  'their,'  by  'suns/ 
if  they  refer  to  the  subject  of  the  verb  on  which  the  clause  depends. 

2  Per-spic-io,  -ere,  -spexi,  -spectum. 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE    WITH  INFINITIVE.         15 

2.  He  heard  that  the  enemy  had  broken l  into  the  camp. 

3.  It  was  announced  that  the  trees   and  buildings  had 
been  set  on  fire'2'  by  the  enemy. 

4.  He   promised  that  rewards   should   be   given   to   the 
soldiers. 

5.  He  heard  that  the  guilty  were  being  punished. 

6.  He  hoped  that  his  brother  and  sister  would  be  there 3. 

7.  He  hoped  that  the  enemy  would  be  conquered  by  the 
dictator  Camillus. 

8.  He  said*  that  the  citadel  had  not^  been  taken. 

9.  I    did    not    believe    that    the    enemy   had   taken   the 
citadel. 

10.  // was  already  clear5  to  all  that  war  was  impending. 

11.  He  promised  that  you  and  your  wife  should  receive 
rewards. 

12.  The  Romans  heard  that  Luceria,  a  town  of  Apulia, 
was  being  besieged  by  the  Samnites. 


SECTION  4.     On  the  mood  and  tense  in  a  subordinate 
clause  depending  on  an  accusative  with  infinitive. 
Sentences  to  be  learned : 

1.  Dicit  eos,  qui  boni  sint,  beatos  esse. 

He  says  that  those,  who  are  good,  are  happy. 

2.  Dixit  eos,  qui  boni  essent,  beatos  esse. 

He  said  that  those,  who  were  good,  were  happy. 

3.  Dicit  te  laudatum  iri,  quod  heri  veneris. 

He  says  that  you  will  be  praised,  because  you  came 
yesterday. 

1  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  6,  n.  3.  2  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  6,  n.  2. 

3  Ad-sum,  -esse,  -fui.  *  See  Ex.  i,  n.  i. 

5  Apparet,  it  is  clear. 


l6  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

4.  Dixit  te  laudatum  iri,  quod  heri  venisses. 

He  said  that  you  would  be  praised,  because  you  had 
come  yesterday. 

In  each  of  these  sentences  we  have  a  subordinate1  clause 
depending  on  the  accusative  with  infinitive,  in  Sentences  i 
and  2  a  relative  clause  qualifying  '  eos/  the  subject  of  the  in- 
finitive, in  Sentences  3  and  4  a  clause  introduced  by  the 
conjunction  'quod,'  qualifying  the  infinitive  'laudatum  iri/ 
Notice  that  the  verb  in  the  subordinate  clause  is  in  all  cases 
in  the  subjunctive. 

Notice,  further,  that  where  the  verb,  on  which  the  accu- 
sative with  infinitive  depends,  is  in  a  primary  tense,  as  in 
Sentences  i  and  3,  the  verb  in  the  subordinate  clause  is  in  the 
present  or  perfect  subjunctive :  where  the  principal  verb 
is  in  a  historic  tense,  as  in  Sentences  2  and  4,  the  verb  in  the 
subordinate  clause  is  in  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive. In  general,  the  English  will  be  a  sufficient  guide 
as  to  the  tense  to  be  used ;  but  if  you  are  in  doubt  whether 
to  use  the  imperfect  or  the  perfect,  remember  that  the  im- 
perfect subjunctive  can  only  be  used  when  the  principal  verb 
is  in  a  historic  tense^  the  perfect  only  when  the  principal  verb 
is  in  a  primary  tense. 

Be  careful  to  distinguish  between  a  clause  depending  on 
the  accusative  with  infinitive,  and  introduced  by  either  a 
relative  pronoun  or  a  subordinating  conjunction  2,  and  a  clause 
joined  to  the  accusative  with  infinitive  by  a  coordinating 
conjunction z. 

1  A  clause  is  said  to  be  subordinate  to  another  clause  when  it  depends 
on  (i.  e.  completes  the  meaning  of)  that  clause,  and  does  not  itself  make 
any  fresh  statement. 

3  A  subordinating  conjunction  introduces  a  clause  which  makes  no 
fresh  statement,  but  only  completes  the  meaning  of  the  statement  made 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE    WITH  INFINITIVE.        17 

Thus,  in  the  sentence  '  He  said  that  the  holidays  were 
over,  and  he  must  go  back  to  school/  the  clause  '  he  must 
go  back  to  school '  does  not  depend  on  the  clause  '  that  the 
holidays  were  over/  but  makes  a  fresh  statement.  It  is 
merely  joined  to  this  clause  by  the  coordinating  conjunction 
'  and/  and  both  clauses  alike  depend  on  the  verb  '  said/ 
and  must  in  Latin  be  turned  by  the  accusative  with  in- 
finitive. 

Exercise  4. 

1.  He  said  that  he  was  a  Roman  citizen,  and1  could  not**- 
be  condemned  unheard. 

2.  He  learned*  that  those,  who  had  escaped  out  of  the 
battle,  had  perished  in  the  lake. 

3.  He  says 3  that  those,  who  conspired  against  the  tyrant, 
did  not*  fear  death. 

4.  He  suspected  that  he  was  being  deceived  by  those,  who 
said  this. 

5.  He  felt  that  his  strength  was  failing,  and  that  he  would 
soon  die. 

6.  He  confesses  that  he  has   done  many  things,   which 
cannot  be  approved. 

7.  He  affirmed  that  all,  who  had  been  taken  by  the  enemy, 
would  be  killed. 

8.  I    feel   that   those,    who    did   such   things,    are  justly 
punished. 

9.  He  heard  that  the  soldiers,  whom  he  had  placed  on  4 
the  right  wing,  were  already  flying. 

in  the  principal  clause.     A  coordinating  conjunction  joins  two  clauses 
together,  each  of  which  makes  a  separate  statement. 

1  Nee,  and  not.  2  Cog-nosc-o,  -ere,  -novi,  -nitum. 

3  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  i,  n.  i.  *  In. 

C 


1 8  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

\  o.  They  knew  that  their  wives  and  children,  whom  they 
were  leaving  in  the  city,  would  be  led  away 1  into  slavery. 


Exercise  5. 

1.  He  promises  that  those,  who  saved  their  commander, 
shall  receive  large  rewards. 

2.  He  cried  out*  that  the  enemy  were  cowards,  and  would 
soon  surrender  the  fort. 

3.  They  felt  that  they  had  been  betrayed  by  their  com- 
manders, who  were  leading  them  to  the  battle. 

4.  He  announces  that  the  town  has  been  taken,  and  that 
the  citizens  are  being  butchered. 

5.  He  had  already  learned*  that  those,  who  were  on4  the 
right  wing,  were  being  hard  pressed*  by  the  enemy. 

6.  He  promised  that  rewards  should  be  given  to  those 
soldiers,  who  had^r.?/6  broken"1  into  the  enemy's  camp. 

7.  He  thinks  that  these  towns  will  never  be  taken  by  our 
men 8,  unless  we  have  a  better  general. 

8.  He  said  that  the  legions  had  been  put  to  flight*  by 
those,  whom  they  had  often  before  conquered. 

9.  It  was  announced  to  Caesar,  that  the  enemy's  infantry 
were  still  on  this  side  o/10  the  river,  but11  that  the  cavalry  had 
already  crossed  to  the  other  bank. 


I  Ab-duc-o,  -ere,  -duxi,  -ductum. 

3  Clam-o,  -are.  3  See  Ex.  4,  n.  2.  *  See  Ex.  4,  n.  4. 

5  Prem-o,  -ere,  press-i,  -urn,  I  press  hard.  6  Adjective. 

7  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  6,  n.  3.  8  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  2,  n.  i. 

9  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  5,  n.  5.  10  Citra. 

II  Vero.    This  word  must  stand  after  the  first  word  of  the  clause  which 
it  joins  on  to  the  preceding  clause.    » 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE    WITH  INFINITIVE.        19 

10.  I  know  that  the  enemy  have  invaded  our  territory, 
and  are  already  drawing  mar *  to  the  city ;  but  I  hope  that 
the  allies  will  arrive  before  them 2. 


Exercise  6. 

1.  He  heard  that  the  allies  were  being  blockaded,  and* 
could  not 3  long  endure  the  scarcity  of  corn. 

2.  The  enemy  will  learn*  from  deserters,  that  our  forces 
are  about  to  cross  the  river,  where  it  is  narrow. 

3.  These  men  swore  that  they  would  allow  no  one  to  be 
king 5,  while  they  themselves  lived. 

4.  I  affirm  that  the  Tarquins  have  reigned  too  long ;  I  am 
sure 6  that  they  cannot  live  [as] 7  private  men ;  I  believe  that 
their  name  will  be  dangerous  to  our  liberty. 

5.  It  was  announced  that  the  two  cohorts,  which  had 
been  left  on  the  other  side  of8  the  river,  were  being  hard 
pressed 9  by  the  enemy, 

6.  He  said  that  a  letter  would  be  given  to  the  ambassadors, 
who  had  come  from  our  allies  the  Athenians. 

7.  I  am  sure6  that  our  houses  and  temples  will  be  set  on 
fire 10,  if  they  are  taken  n  by  the  enemy. 

8.  He  felt  that  the  riches  and  honours,  which  most1"21  men 
desired,  would  soon  pass  away 13. 


1  Appropinqu-o,  -are,  1  draw  near.  2  Prius,  adverb. 

3  See  Ex.  4,  n.  i.  *  See  Ex.  4,  n.  2. 

Regn-o,  -are,  I  am  king.  6  Pro  certo  habeo. 

Words  enclosed  in  square  brackets  are  to  be  omitted  in  translating. 

Trans.               9  See  Ex.  5,  n.  5.  10  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  6,  n.  2. 

1  Say  '  have  been  taken.'  r-  Plerique. 
3  Inter-eo,  -Ire,  -ii,  -itum. 

C  2 


20  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

9.  He  said  that  the  allies,  if  they  had  sinned,  had  already 
suffered  a  heavy  punishment^. 

10.  The  citizens  believed  that  the  enemy  had  fled,  and 
that  our  men 2  were  the  conquerors. 


1  Poenas  do  (dare,  dedi,  datum),  I  suffer  punishment. 

2  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  2,  n.  i. 


CHAPTER     III. 
ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

IT  is  assumed  that  the  pupil  has  been  sufficiently  practised 
in  the  ordinary  use  of  the  accusative  for  the  object  noun, 
while  learning  the  declensions  of  nouns. 

SECTION  1.     On  the  accusative  of  kindred  meaning. 
Sentence  to  be  learned  : 

Duram  servit  servitutem. 
He  serves  a  hard  slavery. 

If  we  consider  the  above  sentence,  we  shall  see  at  once 
that  the  word  *  servitutem,'  though  it  depends  on  the  verb 
'  servit/  does  not  denote  an  object,  or  thing  acted  upon. 
We  may  notice,  further,  that  it  denotes  a  kind  of  action, 
the  same  kind,  namely,  which  is  expressed  by  the  verb 
'  servit/ 

An  intransitive  verb,  then,  may  take  an  accusative  of  a  noun 
denoting  the  same  kind  of  action  which  is  expressed  by  the  verb. 
This  is  called  an  accusative  of  kindred  meaning^  because  the 
meaning  of  the  noun  in  the  accusative  is  akin  to,  or  like, 
the  meaning  of  the  verb.  The  noun  in  the  accusative  is 
almost  always  qualified  by  an  adjective,  as  in  the  above 
example. 

By  way  of  exercise,  let  a  noun  of  kindred  meaning,  with 


22  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

a  suitable  adjective,   be  supplied  to  each  of  the  following 
verbs  : 

1.  He  sleeps -. 

2.  He  died 


3.  The  soldiers  fought 

4.  The  bird  sings 

5.  The  planets  run 

6.  The  traveller  goes  . 

7.  The  bells  ring 


8.  The  musician  played 

9.  The  cricketers  played 

10.  The  savages  dance  _ 


SECTION  2.     On  verbs  of  asking  and  teaching. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Nunquam  divitias  deos  rogavi. 
/  never  asked  riches  of  the  gods. 

2.  Quid  nunc  te  litteras  doceam  ? 
Why  should  I  now  teach  you  letters  ? 

3.  Nunquam  divitias  a  me  dei  rogati  sunt. 
The  gods  were  never  asked  for  riches  by  me. 

4.  Quid  nunc  tu  litteras  a  me  docearis  ? 

Why  should  you  now  be  taught  letters  by  me  ? 

To  find  the  object  noun  in  the  first  of  these  sentences, 
we  might  say  either  '  Whom  did  I  never  ask  ? '  or  '  What  did 
I  never  ask  ? '  The  answer  to  the  former  question  would 
be  '  The  gods,'  to  the  latter,  '  Riches/  Thus  we  have  two 
object  nouns. 

So  also,  to  find  the  object  noun  in  the  second  sentence, 
we  might  say  either  '  Whom  should  I  teach  ? '  or  '  What 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE.  2$ 

should  I  teach  ? '  The  answers  to  these  two  questions 
would  again  give  us  two  object  nouns,  '  you '  and  '  letters/ 

We  see,  then,  that  a  verb  of  asking  or  teaching  can  have 
two  object  nouns,  one  denoting  a  person,  the  other  a  thing. 
Both  are  in  Latin  put  in  the  accusative. 

If  we  look  at  the  third  and  fourth  sentences,  we  shall 
see  that  they  mean  just  the  same  as  the  first  and  second, 
but  in  each  of  them  the  verb  is  turned  into  a  passive  verb. 
The  noun  denoting  the  person  asked  or  taught  now  becomes 
the  subject  noun,  and  is  in  the  nominative,  but  the  noun 
denoting  the  thing  asked  or  taught  is  still  in  the  accusative. 

Caution.  In  English  we  often  use  a  preposition  after 
a  verb  of  asking.  Thus  we  may  say  either  '  I  never  asked 
riches  of  the  gods'  or  'I  never  asked  the  godsy^r  riches.' 
Do  not  be  misled  by  the  English  preposition,  but  remember 
that  in  Latin  the  accusative  must  be  used  both  for  the  person 
asked  and  for  the  thing  asked  for,  if  the  verb  is  active  (and 
for  the  thing  asked  for,  even  if  the  verb  is  passive),  no  matter 
what  preposition  may  be  used  in  English. 

Exercise  1. 

1.  The  Achaeans  asked  Philip,  the  king  of  the   Mace- 
donians, for  aid. 

2.  He  said  that  he  and  his  wife  had  been  asked  for  their 
opinions  about  this  matter. 

3.  He   is  teaching  the  same  art,   which  he  was  taught 
by  you. 

4.  [It]  is  better  to  fight  a  farce1  battle  than  to  serve  a 
disgraceful  slavery. 

1  Atro-x,  -cis. 


24  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

5.  He  asks  money  of  those,  whom  he  has  taught  philo- 
sophy. 

6.  You  and  I  have  been  asked  for  money  by  those,  by 
whom  we  were  taught  philosophy. 

7.  He  said  that  he  was  teaching  his  son  letters. 

8.  You  and  your  brothers  have  been  asked  for  aid  by 
those,  of  whom  you  had  yourselves  asked  advice. 

9.  He  is  being  taught  diligence  by  those,   whom  he   is 
teaching  letters. 

10.  He  said  that  he  would  ask  his  father  for  advice. 


SECTION  3.     On  factive  verbs. 
Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Te  facimus,  Fortuna,  deam. 

We  make  thee,  Fortune,  a  goddess. 

2.  Romulus  urbem  suam  Romam  vocavit. 
Romulus  called  his  city  Rome. 

3.  Magister  pueros  ignavos  putat. 
The  master  thinks  the  boys  idle. 

4.  Fis  dea  a  nobis,  Fortuna. 

Thou  art  made  a  goddess  by  us,  Fortune. 

5.  A  Romulo  urbs  sua  Roma  vocata  est. 
His  city  was  called  Rome  by  Romulus. 

6.  Pueri  a  magistro  ignavi  putantur. 

The  boys  are  thought  idle  by  the  master. 
In  each  of  the  first  three  of  these  sentences  we  have  a 
transitive  verb,  with  an  object  noun  in  the  accusative,  but 
in  each  of  them  the  meaning  of  the  verb  is  incomplete  until 
another  word,  besides  the  object  noun,  is  added.  Thus 
it  would  be  nonsense  to  say,  '  The  master  thinks  the  boys/ 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE.  2$ 

but,  as  soon  as  the  word  '  idle '  is  added,  the  sentence  gives 
a  good  sense.  Again,  although  it  is  good  sense  to  say  '  The 
carpenter  makes  a  table/  or  'Your  father  calls  you,'  yet 
it  is  evident  that,  in  the  senses  in  which  the  verbs  '  make ' 
and  '  call '  are  used  in  Sentences  i  and  2  above,  their  mean- 
ings would  not  be  complete  without  the  words  '  a  goddess ' 
in  Sentence  i  and  'Rome'  in  Sentence  2. 

A  verb  of  making,  calling,  or  thinking,  which  wants 
another  word,  besides  an  object  noun,  to  complete  its 
meaning,  by  showing  what  the  object  is  made,  called,  or 
thought,  is  called  a  /active  verb,  from  facio,  to  make. 

The  word  that  is  added  to  the  object  noun  to  complete 
the  meaning  of  a  factive  verb  is  called  the  complement.  It 
may  be  either  a  noun,  or  an  adjective,  and  must  agree  with 
the  object  noun  in  case,  and,  if  it  is  an  adjective,  in  gender  and 
number  also. 

In  Sentences  4,  5,  and  6,  the  verbs  of  Sentences  1,2,  and 
3  are  turned  into  passive  verbs,  and  the  object  noun  in  each 
sentence  becomes  the  subject  noun,  and  is  of  course  put 
in  the  nominative.  The  complement  is  therefore  in  the 
nominative  also,  as  the  noun  it  has  to  agree  with  is  now  the 
subject  noun.  Thus  a  factive  verb  in  the  passive  becomes 
copulative. 

Exercise  2. 

1.  He  is  thought  wise  by  those,  whom  he  calls  fools. 

2.  Cincinnatus,  having  been  created  dictator,  *  appointed 
C.  Servilius  ^master  of  the  horse. 

3.  Those  whom  we  love  are  called  our  friends. 

4.  My  brother  and  I  have  been  asked  for  money  by  those, 
whom  we  think  very  rich. 

1  Dic-o,  -eje,  dixi,  dictum.  2  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  6,  n.  5. 


26  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

5.  You   and  your  brother  are  being  taught  philosophy 
by  him,  whom  you  call  a  slave. 

6.  You  and  I  are  thought  troublesome  by  those,  whom 
we  have  asked  for  money. 

7.  He  said  that  he  had  been  made  leader,  not  king. 

8.  That  part  of  Gaul,  which  was  nearest  to  Italy,  was 
called  Narbonensis.     , 

9.  They  said  that  they  would  make  this  man  king,  be- 
cause he  had  shown l  himself  a  skilful  leader. 

10.  He  said  that  Caius  was  considered  a  prudent  general. 

Exercise  3. 

1.  They  said  that  they  would  create  him  dictator,  whom 
the  senate  had  judged  worthy. 

2.  We  have  been  made  slaves  by  those,  whom  we  taught 
letters. 

3.  In  the  Ligurian   sea  is  the  island  Corsica,  which  the 
Greeks  used  to  call  Cyrnus. 

4.  He  said  that  those,  whom  he  had  asked  for  help,  had 
become  cowards. 

5.  He  said  that  this  city  was  called  Capua. 

6.  The  old  man,  who  has  been  asked  for  his  opinion,  is 
considered  very  wise. 

7.  He  is  taught  many  things  by  those,  whom  he  calls 
his  pupils. 

8.  Romulus,  whom  all  thought 2  a  brave  man,  was  called  a 
god  after  his  death. 

1  Praest-o,  -are,  -iti.     '  Show '  is  here  a  factive  verb,  coming  tinder 
the  head  of  verbs  of  making. 

2  «  Thought '  here  = '  used  to  think.' 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE.  27 

9.  He   said   that   those,  who  had  asked  pardon  of  the 
conqueror,  would  be  called  cowards. 

10.  We  know  that  some,  who  seem  learned  to  themselves, 
are  thought  fools  by  others. 


SECTION  4.     On  the  accusative  of  place  whither. 
Sentences  to  be  learned : 

1.  Regulus  Carthaginem  rediit. 
Regulus  returned  to  Carthage. 

2.  Vos  ite  domum;  ego  rus  ibo. 

Go  ye  home  ;  I  will  go  into  the  country. 

3.  Ad  urbem  veni. 
/  came  to  the  city. 

In  the  first  two  of  these  sentences  we  have  the  accusatives 
Carthaginem,  domum,  rus,  used  with  verbs  of  motion,  with- 
out any  preposition,  answering  the  question  '  whither  ? '  just 
as  in  English  we  speak  of  going  home,  not  going  to  home. 
In  Latin  the  preposition  is  left  out  with  the  words  '  domum,1 
1  rus •/  and  names  of  towns  :  with  any  other  word  a  preposition 
(ad,  to,  or,  in,  into)  must  be  used,  as  in  Sentence  3.  With 
the  name  of  a  country,  '  to '  should  be  translated  by  '  in/  not 
'  ad/  '  Ad  Britarmiam  venit '  would  mean  '  He  came  to 
the  coast  of  Britain'  (and  no  further),  whereas,  if  we  say 
'  He  came  to  Britain/  we  really  mean  to  imply  that  he  came 
into  the  country. 

Exercise  4. 

i.  He  said  that  he  would  go  to  Athens,  to  teach^  his  sons 
philosophy. 

1  Say  '  that  (ut)  he  might/  &c. 


28  INTRODUCTION   TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

2.  He  was  sent  into  the  camp,   to  ask1  the  consul  for 
help. 

3.  Onez  of  the  consuls  went  into   Samnium,   the   other 
returned  home. 

4.  Lest  he  should  be  made  a  slave  by  the  conqueror,  he 
fled  into  the  country. 

5.  He   said  that   the   army,   which   they  believed  ready 
for 3  battle,  had  gone  into  winter  quarters. 

6.  Ambassadors  were  sent  to  Rome,  to  ask 4  peace  of  the 
senate. 

7.  He  sent  his  lieutenant  into  Gaul ;  he  himself  returned 
home.  . 

8.  As  soon  as5  he  arrived  in6  the  city,  he  determined  to 
return  to  the  country. 

9.  He  said  that  he  was  going  to  Rome,   to  be  taught^ 
eloquence. 

10.  We  shall  be  asked  for  help  by  the  ambassadors,  who 
have  come  to  England. 


SECTION  5.     On  the  accusatives  of  duration  of  time, 
measure  of  space,  and  respect. 
Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Pericles  quadraginta  annos  praefuit  Athenis. 
Pericles  led  Athens  forty  years. 

2.  Erant  muri  Babylonis  ducentos  pedes  alti. 

The  walls  of  Babylon  were  two  hundred  feet  high. 

1  See  n.  i,  p.  27.  2  Alter,  -a,  -um.  3  Ad. 

*  Say  '  who  should  ask.'  5  Quum  primum. 

6  As  '  to  arrive '  is  a  verb  of  motion,  the  words  '  in '  and  '  at,'  de- 
pending on  it,  must  always  be  turned  into  Latin  as  if  they  were  '  into  ' 
and  '  to.' 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE.  29 

3.  Tremit  artus. 

He  trembles  in  his  limbs. 

4.  Nudae  sunt  lacertos. 

They  are  bare  as  to  the  arms. 

In  the  first  of  these  sentences  the  words  'quadraginta 
annos  '  are  in  the  accusative,  answering  the  question  <  how 
long  ? '  (of  time).  This  is  called  the  accusative  of  duration 
of  time.  In  English  we  often  use  the  preposition  '  for  ' ;  for 
instance,  we  might  say  '  Pericles  led  Athens  for  forty  years/ 
Do  not  be  misled  by  this  into  using  the  dative :  in  answer 
to  the  question  'how  long?'  the  accusative  must  always 
be  used  in  Latin. 

In  the  same  way,  the  accusative  is  used,  as  in  Sentence  2, 
in  answer  to  the  questions  '  how  high  ? '  '  how  deep  ? '  '  how 
long?'  (of  space),  'how  broad?'  '  how  far  ?'  Notice  that 
the  word  'alti/  in  Sentence  2,  agrees  with  'muri';  it  is  the 
words  '  ducentos  pedes/  which  tell  us  how  high  the  walls 
were,  that  are  in  the  accusative.  This  is  called  the  accu- 
sative of  measure  of  space.  It  may  depend  either  on  an 
adjective,  as  '  high/  '  deep/  '  long/  '  broad/  or  on  a  verb 
signifying  distance. 

The  use  of  the  accusative  in  Sentences  3  and  4  is  very 
similar  to  its  use  to  express  measure,  for,  though  the  words 
*  artus '  and  '  lacertos '  do  not  express  a  definite  measure, 
yet  they  may  be  said  to  answer  the  question  '  how  far  ? ' 
(or  '  over  how  much  of  the  body  ? ').  This  is  called  the 
accusative  of  respect,  because  it  also  answers  the  question 
c  in  what  respect  ? '  It  may  depend  on  a  verb,  as  in  Sentence 
3,  or  on  an  adjective,  as  in  Sentence  4.  In  English  we 
sometimes  use  the  preposition  'in/  sometimes  'as  to/  or 
we  might  say,  in  more  old  fashioned  language,  '  in  respect 


30  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

of.'     The  accusative  of  respect  is  chiefly  used  in  poetry  :  in 
prose,  the  ablative  is  generally  used  instead  of  it. 


Exercise  5. 

1.  He  said  that  the  Roman   people   had  flourished  for 
many  centuries. 

2.  He  fled  to  the  city,   which  was  distant  two  hundred 
paces. 

3.  He  said  that  the  soldiers  would  make  a  ditch  many 
feet  broad,  a  few  feet  deep. 

4.  Having  stayed  here  for  many  years,  he  returned  into 
the  country. 

5.  He  said  that  the  wall,  which  was  being  built,  was  two 
hundred  feet  high. 

6.  When  the  army1'2  had  arrived  a/3  Capua,  it  remained 
a  few  days  inside  the  walls. 

7.  He  has  fled  to  Gaul,  which  z's*  many  miles  away4. 

8.  Scouts   informed*   the   general   that   the    enemy  were 
making  a  bridge  two  hundred  feet  long. 

9.  Ambassadors  came  to  Rome,  to  ask 6  help  of  the  senate. 

10.  Augustus,  who  ruled"'   prosperously  for  many  years, 
was  called  a  god. 

1  When  a  sentence  begins  with  a  subordinate  clause  having  the  same 
subject  as  the  principal  verb,  it  is  best  to  begin  in  Latin  with  the  subject 
noun,  putting  it   before  the  conjunction   introducing  the  subordinate 
clause. 

2  When  '  quum '  is  followed  by  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect,  the  sub- 
junctive should  be  used. 

3  See  Ex.  4,  n.  6.  *  Dist-o,  -are,  I  am  away. 

5  Say  '  made  the  general  more  certain.'  6  See  Ex.  4,  n.  4. 

7  Imper-o,  -are. 


ON  THE  ACCUSATIVE.  31 

Exercise  6. 

1.  Numa,  whom  all  thought^  a  wise  man,  was  made  king 
after  Romulus. 

2.  When  I  have  stayed*  here  a  few  days,  I  shall  go  either 
to  London  or  to  my  country-house. 

3.  He  was  called  a  coward  by  those,  whom  he  had  made 
angry. 

4.  When  he  had  remained  there   a  whole  year,   he  re- 
turned home. 

5.  Having  been  informed*  that  this  city  was  considered 
unhealthy,  he  went  away  into  the  country. 

6.  We  and  our  allies  are  building  a  wall  many  feet  high. 

7.  The  scouts  reported  that  the  enemy  had  made  a  ditch 
fifteen  feet  broad,  as  many 4  feet  deep. 

8.  Having   advanced   two   hundred   paces,    we    came    to 
a  mound. 

9.  Those,  whom  you  and  I   call  the  betrayers  of  their 
country,  have  asked  a  reward  of  the  conqueror. 

10.  He  said  that,  when  he  had  stayed  there  a  few  years, 
he  would  go  to  Greece. 

Exercise  7. 

1 .  He  is  called  lord  by  those,  whom  he  has  made  his  slaves. 

2.  He  said  that  the  enemy  had  built  a  tower  two  hundred 
feet  high. 

3.  He  was  asked  for  a  reward  by  those,  whom  he  had 
thought  most  unfriendly. 

4.  Caesar,  having  stayed  three  years  in  Gaul,  determined 
to  cross  to  Britain. 


1  See  Ex.  3,  n.  2.  2  Say  '  shall  have  stayed.' 

3  See  Ex.  5,  n.  5.  *  Totidem,  indeclinable. 


32  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

5.  He  is  called  master  by  those,  whom  he  is  teaching  letters. 

6.  When l  he  had  arrived  at  Capua,  he  learned z  that  the 
enemy  were  distant  one  day's  journey. 

7.  Having  been   created   consul,  he  appointed*   his   son 
his  lieutenant. 

8.  Camillus,  whom  all  thought*  a  skilful  general,  arrived 
in  the  city. 

9.  The  soldiers  are  making  a  rampart  a  few  feet  high. 

10.  He  said  that,  when  he  had  stayed  here  a  few  days, 
he  would  return  into  the  country. 

1  See  Ex.  5,  n.  2.  2  Cog-nosc-o,  -ere,  -novi,  -mtum. 

3  Dic-o,  -ere,  dixi,  dictum.  *  See  Ex.  3,  n.  2. 


CHAPTER    IV. 
ON  THE  DATIVE. 

SECTION  1.  On  the  dative  of  remoter  object  depend- 
ing on  words  expressing  nearness,  demonstration,  and 
their  contraries. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1 .  Colla  jube  domitos  oneri  supponere  tauros. 
Bid  tamed  lulls  place  their  necks  under  the  burden. 

2.  Paulum  sepultae  distat  inertiae  celata  virtus. 
Hidden  worth  differs  little  from  buried  indolence. 

3.  Kara  avis  in  terns  nigroque  simillima  cygno. 

A  rare  bird  in  the  world  and  very  like  a  black  swan, 

4.  Die  mihi  nomen  tuum. 
Tell  me  your  name. 

In  Sentence  i  we  have  a  transitive  verb  '  supponere '  with 
an  object  noun  '  colla '  in  the  accusative ;  but  besides '  the 
object  noun  we  have  also  another  noun  '  oneri/  in  the  dative, 
also  depending  on  the  verb  '  supponere/  and  denoting  the 
thing  under  which  the  bulls  are  to  place  their  necks.  Now 
as  the  thing  acted  on  is  called  the  object,  so,  when  the  action 
expressed  by  the  verb  affects  something  or  somebody  else 
besides  the  direct  or  immediate  object,  this  is  called  the 
remoter  (i.  e.  further)  object.  The  noun  denoting  the  remoter 

D 


34  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

object  is  put  in  the  dative.  Among  the  verbs  which  require 
a  noun  denoting  a  remoter  object  are  those  which  express 
placing  near,  as  suppono,  to  place  under,  impono,  to  place 
on,  circumdo,  to  place  round,  antepono,  to  place  before, 
postpone,  to  place  after,  confero,  to  bring  close  to,  i.  e.  to 
compare  with,  jungo,  to  join,  &c.  Notice  that  most  of  these 
verbs  are  compounded  with  prepositions.  In  English  we 
use  a  verb  and  a  preposition  to  translate  the  Latin  compound 
verb.  The  word  which  denotes  the  direct  object  must  of 
course  be  put  in  the  accusative ;  the  word  denoting  that  near 
which  something  is  placed,  which  in  English  depends  on  a 
preposition,  must  in  Latin  be  put  in  the  dative.  A  noun  in  the 
dative  is  sometimes  found  depending  on  a  verb  expressing 
removal  from,  to  denote  \h&\.from  which  something  is  removed, 
but  the  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition,  is  much  more 
often  used  in  this  sense. 

A  noun  in  the  dative  denoting  a  remoter  object  may 
also  depend  on  an  intransitive  verb  which  expresses  being 
near,  as  subsum,  to  be  under,  adjaceo,  to  lie  near,  haereo,  to 
slick,  &c.,  or,  as  in  Sentence  2,  on  one  which  expresses  the 
contrary  to  this,  viz.  being  distant  from  (disto,  lit.  to  be 
distant,  hence,  to  differ].  The  ablative,  with  or  without  a 
preposition,  is  however  more  commonly  used  to  express  that 
from  which  something  is  distant. 

In  Sentence  3  we  have  a  dative  '  cygno '  depending  on  the 
adjective  ' simillima/  'very  like'  which  again  expresses  a 
kind  of  nearness.  In  the  same  way  '  dissimilis,'  ' unlike' 
takes  the  dative.  Notice  that  here  no  preposition  is  used  in 
English,  though  after  many  adjectives  expressing  nearness 
we  use  the  preposition  *  to/ 

In  Sentence  4  the  dative  '  mihi '  depends  on  the  verb  '  die,' 
and  denotes  the  person  to  whom  something  is  shown.  Here  the 


ON  THE  DATIVE.  35 

word  '  me '  in  English  is  not  the  accusative,  but  the  dative, 
for  it  denotes,  not  the  direct  object,  which  of  course  is 
denoted  by  the  words  '  nomen  tuum/  but  the  remoter  object. 
In  the  same  way  we  may  have  a  dative  depending  on  an  in- 
transitive verb,  such  as  '  to  appear/  '  to  seem/  or  an  adjective 
such  as  '  apparent/  'evident/  'clear';  all  of  which  words 
contain  the  idea  of  something  being  shown  to  someone. 
After  an  adjective  or  an  intransitive  verb  containing  this 
idea,  the  preposition  '  to '  is  used  in  English,  as  '  It  is  evi- 
dent to  all/  '  It  appears  to  me '  :  after  a  transitive  verb  it  is 
more  often  omitted,  as  '  He  showed  his  brother  the  way/ 
though  it  may  be  expressed,  as  '  He  pointed  out  the  way  to 
his  brother/ 

The  dative  is  not  commonly  used  depending  on  a  verb 
that  expresses  the  contrary  to  showing,  to  denote  the  person 
from  whom  something  is  concealed,  but  we  find  it  depending 
on  such  adjectives  as  '  doubtful/  « uncertain/  &c. 

To  sum  up :  a  noun  in  the  dative,  denoting  a  remoter 
object,  may  depend  on  a  verb  (whether  transitive  or  intran- 
sitive) or  adjective  expressing  (i)  nearness,  or  (2)  demons tra~ 
tion  (showing),  or  (though  this  is  less  common)  the  contrary 
meanings. 

Exercise  1. 

1 .  He  said  that  he  would  place *  heavier  burdens  on  1  those, 
who  had  asked  him  for  liberty. 

2.  He  said  that  this  boy  was  like  his  father,  unlike  his 
mother. 


1  Wherever  in  this  and  the  following  exercises  a  verb  and  a  preposi- 
tion in  the  same  clause  are  printed  in  italics,  a  compound  verb  is  to  be 
used  in  Latin. 

D  2 


36  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

3.  He  sent  a  slave  to  meet1  me,  who  showed  me  the  way. 

4.  The   land   which   lies   between   the   rivers    Tigris    and 
Euphrates  is  called  Mesopotamia. 

5.  He  said  that  the  wall,  which  had  been  built  round*  the 
city,  was  two  hundred  feet  high. 

6.  Livy  writes  that  king  Tullus  was  very  unlike  Numa,  the 
former  king. 

7.  Hannibal  showed  his  soldiers  the  fertile  plains,  which 
He  beneath  the  Alps. 

8.  Having   gone    out   to   meet1   the   army,  they  told  the 
consuls  all  these  things. 

9.  Cicero  said  that  he  was  wont  to  weep  over  the  death  of 
Socrates,  [when]  reading  Plato's  book. 

10.  Deserters  told  our  men,  that  the  elephants  had  brought 
the  greatest  terror  on  the  enemy. 


SECTION  2.  On  the  dative  of  remoter  object  depend- 
ing on  words  expressing  advantage,  dominion,  and  their 
contraries. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Quod  alii  donat,  sibi  detrahit. 

What  he  gives  to  another,  he  withdraws  from  himself. 

2.  Ne  libeat  tibi,  quod  nemini  licet. 

Let  not  that  please  thee,  which  is  lawful  to  no  man. 

3.  Parce  pio  generi. 
Spare  a  pious  race. 

1  Obviam,  lit.  *  on  the  way.'  •  The  expression  '  sent  to  meet '  contains 
the  idea  of  nearness,  and,  though  that  idea  is  contained  rather  in  the 
adverb  '  obviam '  than  in  the  verb,  the  same  construction  must  be  used 
as  if  it  were  contained  in  the  verb. 

2  Circum-jic-io,  -ere,  -jec-i,  -turn. 


ON  THE  DATIVE.  37 

4.  Succensere  nefas  patriae. 

//  is  impious  to  be  wroth  with  one's  country. 

5.  Omnibus  his  sententiis  resistitur. 

All  these  opinions  are  opposed  (lit.  Opposition  is  offered 
to  all  these  opinions). 

6.  Patriae  sit  idoneus,  utilis  agris. 

Let  him  be  serviceable  to  his  country,  useful  to  the 
lands. 

7.  Imperat  aut  servit  collecta  pecunia  cuique. 
Hoarded  money  rules  or  serves  every  man. 

If  we  look  at  the  verbs  on  which  the  datives  depend  in  the 
first  five  of  these  sentences,  we  shall  see  that  they  all  contain 
the  idea  of  bringing  advantage  or  the  contrary  to  some 
person  or  thing.  In  each  sentence  the  noun  denoting  the 
person  or  thing,  to  whom  advantage,  or  the  contrary,  is 
brought,  is  in  the  dative.  The  verb  may  be  either  transitive, 
as  '  dono '  and  '  detraho,'  in  which  case  the  direct  object 
must  of  course  be  denoted  by  the  accusative  J,  or  intransitive, 
as  '  libet/  '  licet/  '  parco/  '  succenseo/  '  resisto ' ;  or  we  may 
have  a  similar  dative  depending  on  an  adjective,  as  in 
Sentence  6. 

Notice  that  in  English  we  sometimes  use  the  preposition 
1  to,'  as  '  what  he  gives  to  another/  though  '  to '  is  more 
often  omitted  after  the  verb  '  to  give '  and  many  other  transi- 
tive verbs  which  contain  the  idea  of  bringing  advantage  or 
disadvantage  to  someone,  as  *  Give  me  that  book/  '  He 
refused  me  my  request/  *  He  grudged  me  this  favour/  '  He 
promised  me  a  reward/  'Lend  me  a  pencil/  ' Pay  me  your 
debt':  sometimes  we  use  another  preposition,  as  'He  with- 

1  The  object  noun  of  '  detrahit/  in  Sentence  I,  is  '  id/  understood  as 
the  antecedent  to  '  quod.' 


38  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

draws/hw*  himself/  'to  be  wroth  with  one's  country' :  while 
very  often  the  verb  which  in  Latin  must  be  classed  as  intran- 
sitive is  in  English  considered  as  transitive,  and  the  noun 
which  in  Latin  is  put  in  the  dative  is  in  English  considered 
to  denote  the  direct  object.  Thus  '  to  please,'  '  to  spare,'  '  to 
oppose,'  may  all  in  English  be  followed  by  a  noun,  without 
any  preposition,  denoting  the  object ;  but  the  corresponding 
verbs  in  Latin  are  intransitive,  and  take  a  dative,  which  will 
be  easier  to  understand  if  we  consider  that  'to  please '  =  '  to 
be  pleasing  /<?/  '  to  spare'  =  '  to  be  merciful  to?  '  to  oppose'  = 
'  to  stand  against.'  In  the  same  way  '  to  believe/  '  to  favour/ 
'  to  hurt/  *  to  indulge/  '  to  succour/  '  to  pardon/  '  to  threaten/ 
would  all  be  classed  as  transitive  verbs :  but  the  correspond- 
ing Latin  verbs  '  credo/  '  faveo/  '  noceo/  '  indulgeo/  '  suc- 
curro/  'ignosco/  'minor/  take  the  dative.  There  are 
indeed  several  verbs,  containing  the  idea  of  bringing  ad- 
vantage or  disadvantage  to  someone,  which,  even  in  Latin, 
take  an  accusative  denoting  the  person  to  whom  advantage 
or  disadvantage  is  brought.  Thus,  although  'noceo/  and 
'  obsum/  *  /  am  injurious'  take  a  dative,  '  laedo/  '  /  hurt  I 
takes  an  accusative  :  the  impersonal  verb  '  libet/  and  '  placeo/ 
'  /  please]  ta^e  a  dative,  but  '  delecto/  '  /  delight  I  and  '  juvat/ 
'  it  delights^  take  an  accusative :  most  verbs  meaning  '  to 
help '  take  a  dative,  but  '  adjuvo '  is  an  exception,  and  takes 
an  accusative.  To  avoid  mistakes,  it  will  be  safer,  whenever 
a  verb  seems  to  contain  the  idea  of  bringing  advantage  or 
disadvantage  to  someone,  and  you  are  in  doubt  whether  it 
should  be  considered  as  transitive  or  intransitive,  to  look  it 
out  in  the  Lat.-Eng.  Dictionary,  and  see  what  case  it  takes, 
unless  you  can  remember  an  example  of  its  use. 

Notice,  in  Sentence  5,  the  way  in  which  an  intransitive 
verb  that  takes  the  dative  can  be  used  in  the  passive.     Any 


ON  THE  DATIVE. 


39 


intransitive  verb  can  be  used  impersonally  in  the  passive,  and 
' resistitur '  means  '  Opposition  is  offered  (by  someone)'  A 
dative  of  the  remoter  object  may  be  added  to  this,  just  as  to 
the  active,  and  so  we  get '  His  sententiis  resistitur '  =  '  Opposi- 
tion is  offered  to  these  opinions  j  = '  These  opinions  are  opposed! 
Remember,  then,  that  when  an  English  transitive  verb  is 
turned  in  Latin  by  a  verb  that  is  intransitive  and  takes  the 
dative,  the  Latin  verb,  if  used  in  the  passive,  must  be  used 
impersonally,  and  the  English  subject  noun  must  be  trans- 
lated by  the  dative  in  Latin. 

In  Sentence  7  the  dative  'cuique'  depends  on  the  two 
verbs  'imperat'  and  'servit/  and  denotes  the  person  over 
whom  authority  is  exercised  or  to  whom  obedience  is  paid.  A 
dative  in  this  sense  may  depend  on  a  transitive  verb,  as 
'  Haec  mihi  imperavit,'  *  He  commanded  me  these  things', 
i.e.  ' gave  me  these  commands'  (where  notice  that  the  English 
word  *  me '  is  the  dative) :  on  an  intransitive  verb,  as  in 
Sentence  7 :  or  on  an  adjective,  such  as  '  imperiosus,' 
'  domineering'  When  the  verb  is  intransitive,  the  corres- 
ponding verb  in  English  is  generally  considered  as  transitive, 
and  the  dative  is  translated  as  if  it  denoted  a  direct  object. 
Sometimes,  however,  we  use  the  preposition  c  over/  as  '  He 
rules  over  the  country.' 

Caution.  Although  most  verbs  of  commanding  and  ruling 
take  a  dative  denoting  the  person  commanded  or  ruled  over, 
•'  jubeo,'  to  bid,  '  rego,'  to  rule,  and  a  few  others,  take  an  ac- 
cusative. 

To  sum  up;  a  noun  in  the  dative,  denoting  a  remoter 
object,  may  depend  on  a  verb  (transitive  or  intransitive)  or 
adjective  expressing  (3)  advantage,  (4)  dominion,  or  the  con- 
trary meanings. 

Note. — It  has  already  been  noticed  that  many  of  the  verbs 


40  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

expressing  nearness  are  compound  verbs,  containing  preposi- 
tions. The  same  may  be  said  in  general  of  verbs  that  take 
a  dative  denoting  a  remoter  object.  Whenever,  therefore, 
you  see  that  a  verb  is  compounded  with  a  preposition,  this 
ought  to  suggest  to  you  to  think  whether  its  meaning  does 
not  come  under  one  of  the  four  heads  of  nearness,  demon- 
stration, advantage,  dominion,  with  their  contraries.  But 
beware  of  putting  a  noun  which  really  denotes  a  direct 
object  in  the  dative,  merely  because  it  depends  on  a  verb 
compounded  with  a  preposition,  and  remember,  what  has 
been  already  said  in  Section  i,  that  it  is  the  word  which  in 
English  depends  on  the  preposition  that  is  to  be  expressed  by  the 
dative  in  Latin. 

Exercise  2. 

/ 

1.  Let  him  be  obeyed  who  has  been  set  over  the  army. 

2.  My  son  and  I  know  that  the  laws  place  the  welfare  of 
the  state  before  the  welfare -of  individuals. 

3.  He  said  that,  if  his  enemy'*-  were  made  king,  all  his  riches 
would  be  taken  away  from  him. 

4.  He  told  me  that  these  things  had  been  given  him  by 
his  father,  a  tribune  of  the  soldiers. 

5.  We  will  do  that*  which  you  and  your  father  have  com- 
manded us. 

6.  He  showed*  the  soldiers  that  great  injuries  were  being 
inflicted  on  them  by  the  enemy. 

7.  The  Romans  placed  the  king  of  sacrifices  under*"  the 
pontiff,  lest  the  honour  attached  to  his  title  should  be  in- 
jurious to  their  new  liberty. 


1  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  3,  n.  4.  3  Say  '  those  things.' 

3  Demonstr-o, -are.  4  Sacrificulus,  adjective,  =  '  of  sacrifices.' 


ON  THE  DATIVE.  41 

8.  These  cohorts  were  commanded  ^  to  zgo  to  the  help  of 
the  tenth  legion. 

9.  He  said  that,  if  he  gave*  me  this,  he  would  be  asked 
for  gifts  by  others. 

10.  Heavier  burdens  were  placed  on  the  soldiers,  because 
they  had  not  obeyed  their  commander. 

Exercise  3. 

1.  He  said  that  this  honour,  for  which  he  had  asked  the 
king,  had  been  denied  him. 

2.  They  said  that  they  were  unwilling  to  spare  the  con- 
quered, lest  other  nations  should  *make  war  upon  them. 

3.  I  will  never  believe  you  and  your  wife,  who  have  told 
me  this  about  my  brother  Caius. 

4.  My  slave,  whom  I  had  ordered  to  "'  bring  me  a  sword, 
did  not  obey  me. 

5.  That  young  man  pleases  his  brother,  but  he  does  not 
satisfy  me. 

6.  The  ambassadors  confessed  that  their  nation  had  for 
many  years  served  the  Roman  people. 

7.  Socrates  did  not  believe  that  death  would  take  away 
all  feeling  from  him. 

8.  I  believe  that  we  shall  be  sent  to  Capua  to  meet5  the 
army. 

9.  We  will  not  be  angry  with  the  captives,  but  those  shall 


1  After  '  impero,'  use  '  ut '  with  subjunctive  to  translate  the  English 
infinitive.     For  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive,  see  the  rule  given  in  Chap,  ii, 
Sec.  4. 

2  Sub-ven-io,  -Ire,  -ven-i,  -turn.  *  Say  'should  have  given.' 
4  In-fero,  -ferre,  -tuli,  illatum.  5  See  n.  I. 

e  See  n.  i,  p.  36. 


42  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

be  pardoned,  who  have  entrusted  themselves   to  our   pro- 
tection. 

10.  The  soldiers  were  commanded  not  to  injure^  the  allies 
of  the  Roman  people. 


SECTION  3.     On  the  wider  use  of  the  dative  denoting 
the  person  who  gets  advantage  or  disadvantage. 
Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Numa  virgines  Vestae  legit. 
Numa  chose  virgins  for  Vesta. 

2.  Venus  nupsit  Vulcano. 

Venus  wedded  (lit.  veiled  herself  for]  Vulcan. 

3.  Quid  mihi  Celsus  agit? 
What  is  my  Celsus  doing  ? 

4.  Sunt  nobis  mitia  poma. 

We  have  (lit.  there  are  for  us)  mellow  apples. 

5.  Magnus  civis  obit  et  formidatus  Othoni. 

A  great  citizen  is  dead,  and  one  dreaded  by  Of  ho. 

6.  Legendae  sunt  pueris  Aesopi  fabulae. 

Aesop 's  fables  ought  to  be  read  (lit.  are  to  be  read]  by 
boys. 

7.  Multis  ille  bonis  flebilis  occidit. 

His  death  was  a  cause  of  weeping  (lit.  he  died  to  be 

wepf)  to  many  good  men. 

In  each  of  these  sentences  the  dative  denotes  the  person 
or  persons  for  whose  advantage  or  disadvantage  something 
turns  out.  If  we  consider  the  verb  in  each  of  the  first  four 


1  After  '  impero '  use  '  ne '  with  subjunctive  to  translate  the  English 
not '  with  infinitive. 


ON  THE  DATIVE.  43 

sentences,  we  shall  see  that  it  does  not  necessarily  require 
a  dative  to  complete  its  meaning.  '  Numa  chose  virgins/ 
'  Venus  veiled  herself/  '  What  is  Celsus  doing  ?'  '  There  are 
mellow  apples/ — each  of  these  sentences  would  give  a  com- 
plete sense  without  the  addition  of  a  dative.  But,  as  any 
action  or  circumstance  may  be  to  the  advantage  or  disad- 
vantage of  someone,  a  dative  denoting  the  person  for  ivhose 
advantage  or  disadvantage  it  is  may  be  inserted  in  any  sentence. 

In  Sentence  3,  the  word  'mini'  shows  that  the  speaker  is 
interested  in  what  Celsus  is  doing.  It  cannot  be  translated 
literally  without  giving  a  different  meaning  from  the  original. 
We  might  express  the  meaning  by  translating  it  *  I  want  to 
know/  but  the  translation  'What  is  my  Celsus  doing?'  is 
neater,  and  expresses  the  same  idea.  A  dative  of  a  personal 
pronoun  may  often  be  translated  in  this  way. 

In  Sentence  4,  notice  that  '  sunt  nobis '  is  translated  '  we 
have'  As  anything  that  a  person  has  may  be  said  to  exist 
for  his  advantage  or  disadvantage,  a  common  way  of  turning 
the  verb  *  have '  into  Latin  is  by  using  '  est'  or  ( sunt'  with  the 
thing  that  the  person  has  for  subject,  and  a  dative  denoting  the 
person  who  has  it.  Thus  'est  (or  "sunt")  mihi '='7  have,' 
'est  (or  "sunt")  tibi'='j/0«  have,'  'est  (or  "sunt")  ei'= 
'  he  has}  and  so  on.  So  also  we  may  say  '  erat  (or  "erant") 
mihi'  for  '  I  had',  'erit  (or  "erunt")  mihi'  for  1 1  shall 
have,'  &c. 

In  Sentences  5,  6,  and  7,  the  datives  depend  on  adjectives. 
Notice  that  '  Othoni '  and  '  pueris/  in  Sentences  5  and  6,  are 
translated  ' by  Otho,'  ' by  boys'  The  person  by  whom  any- 
thing is  done  (called  the  agent)  is  generally  expressed  in  Latin 
by  the  ablative  with  '  a '  or  '  ab/  when  the  verb  is  passive, 
but,  as  the  doer  may  also  be  considered  as  the  person  for 
whose  advantage  or  disadvantage  the  thing  is  done,  we 


44  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

sometimes  (but  chiefly  in  poetry)  find  the  dative  used  instead 
of  the  ablative  with  '  a '  or  *  ab,'  depending  on  a  past  par- 
ticiple passive,  as  in  Sentence  5,  where  we  might  translate 
'  formidatus  Othoni/  '  an  object  of  dreadyftr  Otho/ 

In  Sentence  6,  the  dative  depends  on  a  gerundive.  We 
might  translate  this,  '  Aesop's  fables  are  fables  for  boys  to 
read.'  With  a  gerundive,  'a'  or  l  ab'  should  not  be  used  to 
translate  '  by,'  even  in  prose,  but  the  dative  should  be  used 
instead. 

In  the  same  way  the  dative  is  used,  as  in  Sentence  7,  de- 
pending on  a  verbal  adjective  (i.e.  an  adjective  derived  from 
a  verb)  ending  in  -bilis.  These  adjectives  are  like  the 
English  adjectives  ending  in  -able.  Just  as  '  eatable '  means 
'able  to  be  eaten/  so  'flebilis'  (from  vfleo')  means  'able 
to  be  wept  for/  It  may  be  translated  '  a  cause  of  weeping,' 
and  the  dative  is  used  to  denote  the  person  to  whom  some- 
thing is  a  cause  of  weeping,  or  (which  is  the  same  thing)  the 
person  by  whom  something  is  to  be  wept  for. 

Note. — Strictly  speaking,  it  is  only  persons  who  can  be  said 
to  get  advantage  or  disadvantage,  but  the  dative  may  also  be 
used  to  denote  a  thing  which  is  for  the  moment  personified, 
i.e.  spoken  of  as  if  it  were  a  person,  and  could  get  advantage 
or  disadvantage. 

Exercise  4. 

1.  I  *  have  many  books,  which  my  father  gave  me. 

2.  He  2  said  that  pardon  was  2  not  to  be  3  hoped  for  by 
those  who  had  resisted  the  king. 

3.  Good  men  do  not  wish  to  be  rich  for  themselves  only, 
but  for  their  friends  and  for  the  state. 

1  Use  the  verb  '  sum.'  2  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  i,  n.  i. 

3  Sper-o,  -are,  I  hope  for,  trans. 


ON  THE  DATIVE.  45 

4.  Not  all,  who  l  have  a  small  property,  2look  with  envy  on 
the  rich. 

5.  I  shall  tell  the  king,  that  the  cowardice  of  the  soldiers 
was  *a  cause  of  wonder  to  all  good  citizens. 

6.  He  said  that  this  labour  was  to  be  borne  by  those,  who 
thought  themselves  the  bravest. 

7.  The  captive  4  woman,,  torn  from  her  father,  married  the 
conqueror. 

8.  This  woman  l  had  three  sons,  very  like  their  father. 

9.  Danger  5  must  not  be  avoided  by  those,  who  are  thought 
the  bravest. 

10.  These  things,  which  the  conquerer   has  commanded 
us,  6  must  be  done  by  all. 

Exercise  5. 

1.  He  said  that  Cicero  was  to  be  often  read  by  those,  who 
wished  to  write  7  Latin. 

2.  We  *  had  arms,  soldiers,  a  good  commander;  fortune 
alone  was  wanting  to  us. 

3.  Proserpine  married  Pluto,  who  had  carried  her  away 
from  her  mother. 

4.  We  will  place  sentries  round  the  city,  that  8  all  may  be 
like  a  camp. 

5.  9  The  advice,  which  you  gave  us,  pleased  nobody. 

6.  It  was  evident  to  all  that  this  man  had  hoarded  money 
for  his  heirs,  not  for  himself. 

1  Use  the  verb  '  sum.' 

3  In-vid-eo,  -ere,  -vidi,  -visnm.  3  Mirabil-is,  -e. 

4  The  word  '  woman '  need  not  be  expressed  in  Latin. 

5  Say  '  is  not  to  be  avoided.'  6  Say  '  are  to  be  done.' 
7  Latine,  adv.                                             8  I.e.  all  things. 

9  Say  '  those  things,  which  you  advised  (sua-deo,  -dere,  -si,  -sum)  us.' 


46  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

7.  He  set  a  lieutenant  over  the  infantry;  he  himself  ^com- 
manded the  cavalry. 

8.  The   penalty  zmust  be   paid  by  those,  by  whom  the 
wrong  was  done. 

9.  He  said  that  he  would  hold  those,  by  whom  the  con- 
spirators had  been  favoured,  unfriendly  to  himself. 

10.  This   man  3  has  many  pupils,  whom  he  is  teaching 
philosophy. 

SECTION  4.     On  the  dative  of  the  purpose  or  result,  and 
on  the  attracted  dative  of  a  proper  name. 
Sentences  to  be  learned : 

1.  Equitatum  auxilio  Caesari  miserant. 

They  had  sent  the  cavalry  to  the  help  of  Caesar  (\it.for 
a  help  to  Caesar]. 

2.  Virtus  sola  neque  datur  dono  neque  accipitur. 

Virtue  alone  is  neither  given  as  (lit.  for)  a  gift  nor 
received. 

3.  Haec  res  magno  usui  nostris  fuit. 

This  circumstance  was  of  (lit.  for)  great  service  to  our 
men. 

4.  Exitio  est  avidum  mare  nautis.    . 

The  greedy  sea  is  (for)  a  destruction  to  sailors. 

5.  Cui  bono  fuit? 

To  whose  advantage  was  it?  (lit.  To  whom  was  it  for 
an  advantage?} 

6.  Huic  ego  diei  nomen  Trinummo  faciam. 
To  this  day  I  will  give  the  name  Trinummus. 

1  Prae-sum,  -esse,  -fui.        2  See  n.  5,  p.  45.        3  Use  the  verb  '  sum.' 


ON  THE  DATIVE.  47 

In  Sentences  i  and  2  the  datives  '  auxilio '  and  '  dono ' 
answer  the  question  'for  what  purpose  ?'  while  'Caesari'  in 
Sentence  i  denotes  the  person  for  whose  advantage  some- 
thing is  done.  Notice  that  in  English  we  say  '  to  go  to  the 
help  of  a  person/  but  in  Latin  the  person  to  whose  help 
someone  goes  is  denoted  by  a  dative.  So  '  He  comes  to  my 
aid '  would  be  '  Auxilio  mihi  venit.'  In  the  expression  '  dono 
do/  'dono'  may  be  translated  either  'for  a  gift'  or  *  as  a 
gift.' 

In  Sentences  3,  4,  and  5,  the  words  '  magno  usui/  '  exitio/ 
and  '  bono '  show  the  result  to  which  something  leads,  an  idea 
which  is  very  near  akin  to  that  of  the  purpose  for  which 
a  thing  is  done.  '  Nostris/  '  nautis/  and  '  cui '  are  of  course 
datives  denoting  the  persons  who  get  advantage  or  disad- 
vantage. Notice  that  '  magno  usui '  is  translated  '  of  great 
service/  and  that  '  exitio '  is  translated  without  any  English 
preposition,  just  as  if  it  were  a  nominative :  while  in  trans- 
lating 'bono'  the  preposition  'to'  is  used,  and  the  dative 
*  cui '  is  rendered  by  the  possessive  adjective  '  whose.' 

The  dative  of  the  purpose  is  most  commonly  used  with 
a  verb  of  motion,  as  in  Sentence  i,  or  with  a  verb  of  giving 
(as  in  Sentence  2)  or  taking;  under  which  heads  we  may 
include  such  verbs  as  'to  appoint/  'to  choose/  &c.  The 
dative  of  the  result  forms  the  complement  of  a  copulative 
verb,  as  in  Sentences  3,  4,  and  5.  A  second  dative  denoting 
the  person  who  gets  advantage  or  disadvantage  is  very  often 
found  together  with  a  dative  of  the  purpose  or  result. 

In  Sentence  6,  '  huic  diei '  is  a  dative  of  a  remoter  object 
depending  on  '  faciam/  which  is  here  equivalent  to  '  I  will 
give.'  We  should  expect  the  name  '  Trinummus '  to  be  in 
the  accusative,  in  apposition  with  the  word  'nomen';  but. 
when  the  noun  denoting  the  person  or  thing  named  is  in  the 


48  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

dative,  it  is  usual  for  the  name  to  be  in  the  dative  also,  and 
it  is  said  to  be  attracted,  or  drawn,  into  the  case  of  the  noun 
denoting  the  person  or  thing  named. 

Exercise  6. 

1 .  He  said  that  the  senate  was  sending  two  legions  to  the 
help  of  the  consul. 

2.  He  said  that  he  had  seen  the  commander,  to  whom  the 
surname  Felix  had  been  given. 

3.  He  said  that  this  knowledge,  which  he  had  been  taught 
by  me,  had  been  of  great  use  to  him. 

4.  These  things,   which   seemed  to   be  for  our  welfare, 
were  to  the  injury  of  all. 

5.  The  book,  for  which  you  ask  me,  was  given  me  as 
a  present  by  my  father. 

6.  They  answered  the  ambassadors,  that  they  would  never 
give  up  to  others  the  lands,  which  their  ancestors  had  chosen 
for  their  abode. 

7.  Laelius,    the    friend    of    Scipio,    '  had    the    surname 
Sapiens. 

8.  He  promised  me  that  two  cohorts  should  go  to  the  aid 
of  our  men. 

9.  Marcus  was  set  over  the  two  legions,  which  were  left  for 
the  defence  of  the  camp. 

10.  Romulus,  to  whom  the  Romans   gave   the   surname 
Quirinus,  was  considered  a  god  after  his  death. 

Exercise  7. 

i.  Let  us  go  to  the  support  of  those,  by  whom  we  have 
been  asked  for  help. 

1  Use  the  verb  c  sum.1 


ON  THE  DATIVE.  49 

2.  He  1  said  that  virtue  could  lnot  be  given  to  any  one  as 
a  gift. 

3.  He  said  that  this  would  be  for  the  enemy's  advantage, 
[and]  for  our  destruction. 

4.  Minucius,  the  2  master  of  the   horse,   was    very  unlike 
Fabius  the  dictator,  who  3  had  the  surname  Cunctator. 

5.  The    scouts  reported  to  the  consul,  that  the  enemy's 
commander   had   taken   a    very    4  strong   5 position   for   his 
camp. 

6.  6  When  he  had  7  waited  a  few  days  'for  his  colleague, 
he  appointed  the  following  day  for  the  battle. 

7.  They  cried  out  that  *what  was  *fun  to  us  would  be 
10  death  to  them. 

8.  Papirius,  who  3  had  the  surname  Cursor,  1]  was  then  in 
command  of  the  Roman  army. 

9.  Those  who  formerly  12  made  war  12  on  us,  are  now  coming 
to  our  aid. 

10.  6  When  the  army  had  come  to  this  spot,  the  consul 
gave  the  signal  for  retreat. 

Exercise  8. 

i.  He  said  that  all  would  call  him  a  coward,  if  he  13 gave,  up 
his  arms  to  the  enemy. 


See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  i,  n.  i.  2  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  6,  n.  5. 

See  Ex.  6,  n.  i.  *  Munit-us,  -a,  -um.  5  Loc-us,  -i. 

See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  5,  n.  2.  7  Exspect-o,  -are,  I  wait  for,  trans. 

'What'  is  not  here  an  interrogative  pronoun,  but  =  '  that  which.' 
10  Say  '  for  sport,'  '  for  death.' 
Prae-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  I  am  in  command  of. 
ia  See  n.  4,  p.  41. 
13  Say  '  should  have  given  up.' 

E 


50  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

2.  They  l  surrounded  the  camp  with  a  rampart  fifteen  feet 
high,  [and]  a  ditch  2  as  many  feet  broad. 

3.  [It]  was  announced  to  the  commander,  that  the  enemy 
were  3  threatening  the  camp. 

4.  I  hope  that  the  cavalry  will  be  sent  to  our  aid. 

5.  Insults,  blows,  [and]  wrongs  4  must  be  endured  by  the 
conquered. 

6.  6  When  the  ambassadors  had  come  to  Rome,  the  senate 
appointed  the  following  day  for  the  conference. 

7.  He  said  that  I  had  taken  away  this  honour  from  him. 

8.  He  6  said  that  those,  who  placed  glory  before  safety, 
would  6  never  serve  the  conquerors. 

9.  He  6  said  that  he  would  6  never  1 hand  over  to  another 
the  arms  which  had  been  given  him  as  a  present  by  the  king. 

10.  You  and  your  brother  will  be  sent 8  to  meet  the  consul. 

11.  I  shall  not  be  believed,  if  I  9&//my  countrymen  ™  the 
truth. 


1  Say  '  threw  a  rampart  round  the  camp.' 

2  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  6,  n.  4. 

3  Immin-eo,  -ere  (lit.  to  hang  over).  *  See  n.  5,  p.  45. 
5  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  5,  n.  2.  6  Say  '  denied  .  .  .  ever.' 
7  Trad-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum.                                      8  See  n.  i,  p.  36. 

9  Say  «  shall  have  told.'  10  Say  '  true  things.' 


CHAPTER  V. 

ON  THE  ABLATIVE. 

SECTION  1 .     On  the  ablatives  of  instrument  (including 
price),  manner  (including  condition),  and  cause. 
Sentences  to  be  learned : 

1.  Hi  jaculis,  illi  certant  defendere  saxis. 

These  strive  to  defend  with  javelins,  those  with  stones. 

2.  Ego  spem  pretio  non  emo. 
1  do  not  buy  hope  for  a  price* 

3.  Summa  diligentia  scribit. 

He  writes  with  the  greatest  diligence. 

4.  Cum  diligentia  scribit. 
He  writes  with  diligence. 

5.  Pace  tua  dixerim. 

With  your  leave  I  would  say  it. 

6.  Homo  mea  sententia  prudentissimus  est. 
He  is  in  my  opinion  a  very  prudent  man. 

7.  Oderunt  peccare  boni  virtutis  amore. 
The  good  hate  to  sin  from  love  of  virtue.   ^ 

8.  Coeptis  immanibus  effera  Dido. 
Dido  wild  with  dreadful  purposes. 

In  Sentence  i,  the  words  'jaculis'  and  'saxis'  are  in  the 
ablative  case,  and  answer  the  question  '  by  what  means  ?"> 

E  2 


52  INTRODUCTION  TO   LATIN  SYNTAX. 

This  is  called  the  ablative  of  the  instrument  or  means.  In 
English  we  generally  use  the  preposition  '  with,'  sometimes 
'  by/  as  '  The  town  was  taken  by  storm.' 

Be  careful  to  distinguish  between  the  instrument,  or  thing 
by  means  of  which  something  is  done,  and  the  agent,  or 
person  by  whom  it  is  done.  Either  may  in  English  be  denoted 
by  a  noun  depending  on  the  preposition  '  by '  after  a  passive 
verb,  but  if  the  noun  denotes  a  person,  '  a  '  or  '  ab  '  must  be 
used  in  Latin,  while,  if  it  denotes  a  thing,  the  ablative  is  to  be 
used  without  a  preposition. 

In  Sentence  2,  'pretio'  answers  the  question  ^for  what 
price  ? '  This  is  called  the  ablative  of  price,  and  may  be 
explained  as  a  particular  use  of  the  ablative  of  instrument,  as 
the  price  for  which  you  buy  or  sell  a  thing  may  also  be 
looked  upon  as  the  means  by  which  you  buy  or  sell  it.  In 
English  we  use  the  preposition  '  for/  or  '  at/  as  '  at  a  high 
price/ 

Under  this  head  comes  the  use  of  the  ablative  with  '  muto/ 
'/  exchange]  to  denote  the  thing  for  which  something  is 
exchanged.  '  To  exchange  arms  for  a  gown '  is  in  Latin 
'  arma  toga  mutare/ 

In  Sentence  3,  the  words  '  summa  diligentia '  answer  the 
question  '  how  ? '  This  is  called  the  ablative  of  manner.  In 
English  we  generally  use  the  preposition  '  with ' ;  sometimes 
'  in/  as  *  He  does  it  in  good  style.'  ,  In  Latin  the  ablative  is, 
as  a  rule,  not  used  without  a  preposition  in  this  sense  unless 
the  noun  in  the  ablative  is  qualified  by  an  adjective.  IftJiere 
is  no  adjective,  the  preposition  l  cum]  '  with]  must  be  used,  as  in 
Sentence  4.  There  are,  however,  a  few  words  which  can  be 
used  in  the  ablative  of  manner  without  either  '  cum '  or  an 
adjective  ;  as  '  jure  '  ('  with  right]  i.  e.)  '  rightly  ' ;  '  injuria  ' 
('  with  wrong]  i.  e.)  '  wrongly  ' ;  '  modo  '  (with  a  genitive  de- 


ON  THE.  ABLATIVE.  53 

pending  on  it),  '  in  the  manner  (of}} '  '  silentio/  '  in  silence' ; 
'  ordine/  '  in  order  ' ;  and  some  others.  The  words  '  vi,'  '  by 
force!  and  '  fraude/  *  by  fraud',  which  are  also  used  in  this 
way,  may  be  classed  under  the  ablative  of  instrument. 

Care  will  sometimes  be  necessary  to  distinguish  between 
the  instrument  and  the  manner,  as  a  noun  denoting  either 
may  answer  the  question  '  how  ? '  If,  however,  the  word 
about  which  you  are  doubtful  also  answers  the  question  '  by 
what  means  ? '  it  may  be  considered  to  denote  the  instrument, 
and  no  preposition  should  be  used :  if  it  clearly  does  not  answer 
this  question,  it  will  denote  the  manner,  and  the  preposition 
'cum'  must  be  used,  unless  the  noun  is  qualified  by  an  adjective. 

In  Sentence  5,  the  words  '  pace  tua '  answer  the  question 
'  on  what  condition  ? '  This  is  called  the  ablative  of  condition^ 
and  is  closely  akin  to  the  ablative  of  manner.  It  is  equivalent 
to  a  clause  introduced  by  the  conjunction  'if:  '  with  your 
leave '  =  '  if  I  get  your  leave.'  So  in  Sentence  6,  '  in  my 
opinion '  =  '  if  my  opinion  is  taken.'  The  prepositions  used 
in  English,  in  translating  the  ablative  of  condition,  are  '  with/ 
'  in  '  (as  in  the  above  examples),  '  by  '  (as  '  by  your  leave  '), 
and  '  on  '  (as  '  Peace  was  made  on  these  terms '). 

In  Sentences  7  and  8,  the  ablative  answers  the  question 
'  why  ? '  The  words  '  from  love  of  virtue  '  tell  us  why  the 
good  hate  to  sin,  the  words  '  with  dreadful  purposes '  tell  us 
why  Dido  is  wild.  This  is  called  the  ablative  of  cause.  In 
English  we  use  various  prepositions  in  this  sense,  'from,' 
'  with,'  '  for/  '  through '  (as  '  He  did  this  for  fear  of  punish- 
ment '  or  '  through  fear  of  punishment '),  &c.  Instead  of 
the  ablative,  we  may,  in  Latin  also,  have  a  preposition,  '  ob ' 
or  'propter  '  ('  on  account  of'),  with  an  accusative. 

In  each  of  the  above  examples,  the  ablative  is  like  an 
adverb  qualifying  a  verb  or  adjective.  Sometimes  it  may 


54  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

even  be  rendered  by  an  English  adverb,  as  'jure,'  'rightly', 
'  injuria,'  '  wrongly! 

Exercise  1. 

1.  He  said  that  friends  were  *won  by  2  acts  of  kindness. 

2.  Much  3 progress  is  made  by  those,  who  learn  with  zeal. 

3.  Tarpeia,  who  had  asked  the  Sabines  for  their  bracelets, 
was  crushed  with  their  shields. 

4.  A  treaty  was  made  between  the  Romans  and  Albans  on 
these  *  terms,  5  that  6  the  people,  whose  citizens  7  conquered  in 
that  contest,  should  8  rule  over  the  other  people. 

5.  They  say  that  our  men  fought  with  wonderful  readi- 
ness. 

6.  He  said  that  the  boy  had  been  indulged  from  kindness. 

7.  He  said  that  he  would  give  me  a  book,  which  he  had 
bought  for  much  money. 

8.  I  do  not  think,   citizens,  that   these  burdens  will  be 
wrongly  imposed  on  you. 

9.  The  soldiers,  burning  with  anger,  spared  no  one. 

10.  They  9  said  that  they  would  9  never  by  ]°  their  own  will 
exchange  their  magistrates  for  a  foreign  king. 

Exercise  2. 

i.  The  towns,  which  have  been  taken  by  the  enemy  by 
fraud,  "  must  be  recovered  by  us  by  force. 

I  Par-o,  -are.  2  Offici-um,  -i. 

3  Pro-fic-io,  -ere,  -fec-i,  -turn,    I   make   progress.     Use   the   passive 
impersonally,  and  use  an  adverb  for  'much.' 

*  Conditio,  -nis.     Use  the  singular.  5  Ut.  6  Is. 

7  Say  '  should  have  conquered.'  8  Imper-o,  -are. 

9  See  n.  6,  p.  50.  10  Suus. 

II  See  n.  5,  p.  45. 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  55 

2.  They  hoped  that  they  would  be  received  into  alliance 
by  the  conquerors  on  fair  terms. 

3.  I  know  that  you  have  borne  this  calamity  with  fortitude. 

4.  I  did  not  believe  that  you  had  asked  advice  of  those, 
who  had  sold  their  country  for  money. 

5.  Our   men  will  rightly  be   held   cowards,  unless   they 
1  resist  the  enemy  with  2  all  their  strength. 

6.  The  general  *  ordered  the  ships  to  be  4  rowed  on,  and  the 
enemy  to  be  driven  back  with  slings  and  engines;  *  which 
was  of  great  service  to  our  men ;  for  the  barbarians,  alarmed 
by  the  strange  kind  of  engines,  immediately  fled. 

7.  I  hope  that  you  will  never  *fail  your  friends   from 
cowardice. 

8.  The  enemy  were  pardoned  on  these  conditions,  7  that 
they  should  give  postages,  and  obey  the  conquerors. 

9.  Some   were   overwhelmed   by  the   enemy's    weapons, 
others  escaped  with  disgrace. 

10.  Elated  with  hope,  the  soldiers  were  confident  that  they 
could  conquer  those,  who  had  served  them  for  many  years. 


SECTION  2.     On  the  ablative  of  measure. 

Sentences  to  be  learned : 

i.  Paulo  longius  processerant. 

They  had  advanced  a  little  further. 


1  Say  'shall  have  resisted.'  2  Summus  (lit.  highest). 

3  Use  jub-eo  (-ere,  juss-i,  -um),  which  takes  accusative  and  infinitive. 

4  Say  '  to  be  urged  on  (incit-o,  -are)  with  oars.' 

5  Say  *  which  thing.'     The  word  « thing '  should  here  be  expressed  in 
Latin. 

6  De-sum,  -esse,  -fui  (lit.  I  am  wanting).  7  See  Ex.  i,  n.  5. 


56  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

2.  Quo  plus  habent,  eo  plus  cupiunt. 
The  more  they  have,  the  more  they  desire. 

3.  Tanto  pessimus  omnium  poeta, 
Quanto  tu  optimus  omnium  patronus. 

By  so  much  the  worst  poet  of  all,  as  you  are  the  best 
patron  of  all. 

4.  Homerus  annis  multis  fuit  ante  Romulum. 
Homer  was  many  years  before  Romulus. 

5.  Templum  quinque  millibus  passuum  ab  urbe  distat. 
The  temple  is  five  miles  distant  from  tfie  city. 

6.  Millibus  passuum  sex  a  Caesaris  castris  consedit. 
He  encamped  six  miles  from  Caesar  s  camp. 

In  Sentence  i,  the  ablative  neuter  '  paulo '  qualifies  the 
comparative  adverb  '  longius/  and  answers  the  question  '  by 
how  much  (further)  ? '  This  is  called  the  ablative  of  measure. 
It  may  qualify  an  adjective  or  adverb  of  the  comparative  or 
superlative  degree.  In  translating  into  English,  we  often  use 
no  preposition,  as  in  this  sentence.  In  the  same  way  we 
say  'much  greater'  (Lat.  '  multo  major'),  'a  good  deal 
greater '  (Lat.  '  aliquanto  major ').  '  Twice  as  great ' 
is  expressed  in  Latin  by  '  altero  major '  (lit.  '  greater  by  a 
second'}  or  '  duplo  major'  (lit.  ' greater  by  the  double'}',  'no 
greater,'  by  '  nihilo  major '  (lit.  '  greater  by  nothing ').  Some- 
times we  use  the  preposition  '  by/  as  '  greater  by  half  (Lat. 
'  dimidio  major').  Where  we  have  two  comparatives  answer- 
ing to  one  another,  each  preceded  by  '  the,'  as  in  Sentence  2, 
we  must  in  Latin  put  in  '  quo  '  ('  by  what'} — <  eo '  ('  by  that'}, 
or  '  quanto '  ('  by  how  much '} — '  tanto  '  ('  by  so  much '). 
Where  the  former  of  two  comparatives  or  superlatives  has 
4  tanto '  with  it  and  the  latter  '  quanto,'  as  in  Sentence  3,  we 
may  translate  these  words  '  by.  so  much ' — '  as.' 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  57 

In  the  same  way,  the  ablative  of  measure  may  be  joined, 
as  in  Sentence  4,  to  a  preposition  (or  to  an  adverb  or  con- 
junction) signifying  '  before '  or  *  after/  in  which  case  the 
ablative  answers  the  question  '  how  long  (before]  ? '  or  '  how 
long  (after]  ? '  Be  very  careful  to  distinguish  this  from  the 
question  '  how  long  ? '  (where  the  words  are  not  followed  by 
'  before '  or  '  after '),  the  answer  to  which  must  be  in  the 
accusative  (see  Chap,  iii,  Sect.  5). 

The  ablative  of  measure  is  also  sometimes  used,  just 
like  the  accusative,  in  answer  to  the  question  '  how  far  ? ' 
qualifying  a  verb  expressing  distance,  as  in  Sentence  5,  where 
the  words  '  quinque  millibus  passuum '  tell  us  by  how  much 
the  temple  is  distant  from  the  city,  and  even,  as  in  Sentence 
6,  where  no  verb  expressing  distance  is  used. 

Exercise  3. 

1.  He  says  that  our  forces  are  becoming  a  little  greater 
1  every  day. 

2.  The  more  we  are,  the  greater  will  be  the  slaughter. 

3.  2  He  was  made  general  two  years  after  that  battle,  2  and 
*  commanded  the  army  for  three  years. 

4.  A  few  days  afterwards  the  captives  were  sent  home  un- 
harmed on  this  condition,  4  that  none  of  our  allies  should  be 
injured. 

5.  If  this  man  5  is  killed  by  my  6  command,  I  shall  be  no 
safer. 

6.  He  said  that  Alexander  was  much  the  most  powerful  of 
all  kings,  who  were  then  living. 

1  Indies.  2  Say  '  having  been  made  ...  he  commanded.' 

3  Prae-sum,  -esse,  -fui.  *  Ne  quis  =  that  none. 

'•  Say  '  shall  have  been  killed.' 
•  Jussu,  abl.  of  4th  decl.  (nom.  not  in  use). 


58  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

7.  The  1more  this  man  indulges  his  anger,  the *  more  do  all 
men  hate  him. 

8.  He  said  that  the  number  of  the  enemy  would  soon  be 
twice  as  great. 

9.  A  few  hours  before  the  battle  it  had  been  announced  to 
the  general,  that  the  allies  had  pitched. their  camp  six  miles 
from  the  river. 

10.  He  was  dismissed  with  insults  by  those  whom  he  had 
asked  for  help. 


SECTION  3.  On  the  ablative  of  material,  and  on  the 
use  of  the  ablative  with  certain  verbs,  adjectives,  and 
nouns. 

Sentences  to  be  learned : 

1.  Cibus  eorum  lacte,  caseo,  came  constat. 

Their  food  consists  of  milk,  cheese,  and  flesh. 

2.  Fungar  vice  cotis. 

I  will  perform  the  office  of  a  whetstone. 

3.  Hannibal,  quum  victoria  posset  uti,  frui  maluit. 
Hannibal,  when  he  might  have  used  his  victory,  pre- 
ferred to  enjoy  it. 

4.  Rex  impius  auro  vi  potitur. 

The  impious  king  gets  possession  of  the  gold  by  force. 

5.  Dignum  laude  virum  Musa  vetat  mori. 

A  man  worthy  of  praise  the  Muse  forbids  to  die. 

6.  Auctoritate  tua  mihi  opus  est. 
/  have  need  of  your  advice. 

In  Sentence  i,  the  ablatives  '  lacte,  caseo,  carne '  denote 

1  Magis.     Plus  is  not  commonly  used  as  an  adverb. 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  59 

the  material  of  which  the  food  consists.  In  English,  we 
generally  use  the  preposition  'of  in  this  sense.  This  is  a 
particular  use  of  the  ablative  of  the  instrument,  for  the 
material  of  which  a  thing  is  made  may  also  be  looked  upon 
as  a  means  by  which  it  is  made. 

In  Sentences  2,  3,  and  4,  the  words/  vice/  '  victoria,'  '  auro/ 
are  really  ablatives  of  instrument  depending  on  the  verbs 
'  fungor/  '  /  busy  myself  (with} ',  '  utor/  *  /  employ  myself 
(with}]  '  fruor/  '  /  enjoy  myself  (with)]  and  '  potior,'  *  /  make 
myself  powerful  (with) ; '  though  the  first  three  of  these  verbs 
are  generally  rendered  in  English  by  transitive  verbs,  '  I  per- 
form] 1 1  use]  '  I  enjoy]  and  the  ablatives  depending  on  them 
are  then  translated  as  object  nouns,  without  any  preposition  ; 
while  '  potior'  is  usually  translated  '  /  get  possession  (of).' 
In  the  same  way  an  ablative  is  used  with  '  nitor,'  '  /  support 
myself  (with}]  or  '  lean  (on),'  and  '  vescor,'  ' I  feed  myself 
(with}'  which  may  also  be  rendered  ' I feed  (on)'  or  by  a 
transitive  verb,  'I  eat! 

So  also  the  adjectives  *  fretus/  '  relying  (on}'  '  praeditus/ 
'  endued  {with},'  *  contentus,'  '  content  (witH)]  take  an  abla- 
tive, which  may  be  similarly  explained  as  denoting  an  instru- 
ment or  means. 

An  ablative  is  also  used,  as  in  Sentence  5,  with  '  dignus,' 
'  worthy]  '  indignus,'  '  unworthy]  and  '  dignor,'  c  /  think 
worthy]  denoting  that  of  which  a  person  (or  thing)  is  worthy 
or  unworthy.  This  is  akin  to  the  ablative  of  price.  'Dignor' 
is  a  transitive  verb,  and  the  person  thought  worthy  must  of 
course  be  denoted  by  an  accusative. 

In  Sentence  6,  the  words  '  opus  est '  mean  literally  '  there 
is  a  work  (to  be  done}'  and  the  ablative  denotes  the  means 
by  which  it  is  to  be  done.  *  Usus  est,'  which  is  used  in  just 
the  same  way,  means  literally  *  there  is  a  use  (to  be  made}' 


60  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

Both  expressions  may  be  translated  '  there  is  need  (of),'  and 
the  noun  denoting  the  thing  of  which  there  is  need  must  be 
in  the  ablative.  '  Mihi '  is  the  dative  denoting  the  person 
who  has  need  (see  Chap,  iv,  Sect.  3). 

Exercise  4. 

1.  He  was  killed  by  the  same  device,  which  he  had  often 
used  himself. 

2.  We  have  need  of  the  advice  of  those,  who  are  endued 
with  greater  wisdom. 

3.  He  said  that  the  soldiers,  if  they  fought  with  zeal,  would 
soon  gain  possession  of  the  enemy's  camp. 

4.  The  longer  we  *  sit  here  inactive,  the  2  more  will  the 
enemy  despise  us. 

5.  Relying  on  the  skill  of  their  commander,  the  soldiers 
3  rushed  on  the  enemy's  camp  with  the  greatest  eagerness. 

6.  Compelled  by  hunger,  the  soldiers  were  feeding  on  roots 
and  herbs. 

7.  He  4 said  that  those  could  4  not  be  pardoned,  who  had 
5  shown  themselves  unworthy  of  pity. 

8.  We  have  need  of  masters  6  to  teach  us  this  art. 

9.  When  you  ^  have  performed  this  duty,  you  will  be  able 
to  enjoy  leisure. 

10.  A  bridge,  which  had  been  made  of  ships  a  few  days 
before,  was  two  miles  distant  from  our  camp. 

Exercise  5. 

i.  Relying  on  the  prudence  of  the  king,  we  were  enjoying 
peace. 

1  Say  '  shall  sit.'  2  See  n.  i,  p.  58. 

3  Irrn-o  (-ere,  -i,  -turn)  in  (lit.  into). 

*  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  i,  n.  i.  5  See  n.  i,  p.  26. 

6  Say  '  who  may  teach.'  7  Say  '  shall  have  performed.' 


ON  THE   ABLATIVE.  6 1 

2 .  He    said   that   he    would   have  need  of  prudence,  *  to 
perform  these  duties  well. 

3.  He  said  that  those,  who  used  their  power  well,  were 
worthy  of  the  2  highest  praise. 

4.  The  more  serious  the  danger  is,  the  greater  will  be  the 
glory. 

5.  Let  those  be  silent,  who  are  endued  with  no  wisdom. 

6.  He  3  says  that  he  3  cannot  buy  for  money  the  food,  of 
which  he  has  need. 

7.  He  said  that  our  men  would  soon  get  possession  of  the 
standards,  which  had  been  lost  by  treachery. 

8.  Those,  who  are  content  with  4  their  own  lot,  have  5  no 
jieed  of  riches. 

9.  A  few  hours  after  the  battle  the  soldiers  constructed  a 
rampart  of  trees  and  earth. 

10.  He  said  that  his  health,  on  which  we  6  were  depending, 
had  already  become  a  good  deal  weaker  from  old  age. 


SECTION  4.     On  the  ablative  of  quality,  and  the  abla- 
tive absolute. 

The  uses  of  the  ablative  of  which  we  have  had  examples 
in  the  last  two  sections  may  be  explained  as  special  instances 
of  the  ablative  of  instrument :  this  section  contains  examples 
of  some  special  uses  of  the  ablative  of  manner. 
Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

i.  Senex  promissa  barba,  horrenti  capillo. 
An  old  man  with  long  beard  and  rough  hair. 

1  Say  '  that  he  might  perform.'  a  Summus. 

3  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  i,  n.  i.  4  Sutis.  5  Non. 

'  Nit-or,  -i,  nisus  sum. 


62  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

2.  Vir  fuit  magna  vi  et  animi  et  corporis. 

He  was  a  man  of  great  force  both  of  mind  and  of  body. 

3.  Regibus  exactis,  consules  creati  sunt. 

When  kings  had  been  driven  out,  consuls  were  created. 

4.  Hoc  responso  dato  discessit. 
Having  given  this  answer,  he  departed. 

5.  Nil  desperandum,  Teucro  duce  et  auspice  Teucro. 
There  must  be  no  despair,  with  Teucer  for  leader  and 

Teucer  for  omen-giver. 

6.  Natus  est  Augustus  consulibus  Cicerone  et  Antonio. 
Augustus  was  born  in  the  consulship  of  Cicero  and 

Antonius. 

7.  Jamque  cinis,  vivis  fratribus,  Hector  erat. 

And  now  Hector  was  ashes,  while  his  brothers  were 

alive. 

In  Sentence  i,  the  words  '  with  long  beard  and  rough  hair' 
describe  the  old  man,  and  answer  the  question  '  of  what 
kind?'  So  also,  in  Sentence  2,  the  words  'of  great  force 
both  of  mind  and  of  body '  tell  us  of  what  kind  the  man 
was.  The  ablative  used  in  this  sense  is  called  the  ablative  of 
quality  ('quails '  =  '  of what  kind?')  or  description.  In  all 
its  other  uses,  the  ablative  is  like  an  adverb,  but  the  ablative 
of  quality  is  like  an  adjective,  for  it  qualifies  a  noun.  It  is  in 
fact  an  adverbial  phrase  used  for  an  adjective,  just  as  in 
English  we  use  an  adverb  in  the  place  of  an  adjective,  when 
we  talk  of  a  person  being  well  or  poorly.  In  translating  an 
ablative  of  quality,  we  sometimes  use  the  preposition  '  with/ 
sometimes  '  of/ 

The  ablative  of  quality  can  only  be  used  when  the  noun 
in  the  ablative  has  an  adjective  qualifying  it.  To  turn  into 
Latin  '  a  man  with  a  beard/  '  a  man  of  courage/  we  must 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  63 

turn  the  adjectival  phrases,  '  with  a  beard/  '  of  courage/  into 
the  adjectives,  '  bearded/  '  brave/  of  course  making  the 
adjective  agree  with  the  noun  it  qualifies  ('  vir  barbatus,'  '  vir 
fortis '). 

In  Sentences  3,  4,  5,  6,  and  7,  we  have  instances  of  the 
construction  called  the  ablative  absolute.  This  usually  con- 
sists of  a  noun  in  the  ablative  and  a  participle  agreeing  with 
it.  It  is  closely  akin  to  the  ablative  of  condition,  and,  like 
that,  it  may  be  turned  into  a  clause,  by  putting  in  a  conjunc- 
tion (generally  '  when/  sometimes  '  while/  '  if/  '  though/  &c.) 
and  turning  the  participle  into  a  finite  verb.  Thus  '  regibus 
exactis '  (lit;  '  with  kings  driven  out]  or  '  kings  having  been 
driven  out ')  =  '  when  kings  had  been  driven  out.'  If  the 
principal  verb  of  the  sentence  is  in  a  historic  tense,  a  past 
participle  should  be  turned  into  a  pluperfect,  a  present  parti- 
ciple into  an  imperfect.  It  is  generally  best  to  turn  an 
ablative  absolute  into  a  clause  in  translating  into  English. 

Another  common  way  of  translating  an  ablative  absolute, 
when  it  consists  of  a  noun  and  a  past  participle,  is  to  turn 
the  past  participle  passive  into  a  past  (or  sometimes  a  present) 
participle  active,  qualifying  the  subject  noun  of  the  principal 
verb,  and  to  render  the  noun  in  the  ablative  as  an  object 
noun  depending  on  this  participle.  Thus,  in  Sentence  4, 
'  hoc  response  dato  '  ('  this  answer  having  been  given  ')  may 
be  translated  '  having  given  this  answer'  But  of  course  this 
can  only  be  done  when  the  action  expressed  by  the  participle 
was  done  by  the  same  person  as  the  action  expressed  by  the 
principal  verb. 

Sometimes,  instead  of  a  participle,  we  have  a  second  noun 
in  apposition  with  the  first,  as  in  Sentences  5  and  6,  or  an 
adjective,  as  in  Sentence  7.  'Teucro  duce  '  may  be  trans- 
lated '  with  Teucer  for  leader •/  or  '  while  Teucer  is  leader' 


64  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

1  Consulibus  Cicerone  et  Antonio '  (lit.  '  with  Cicero  and 
Antonius  consuls')  may  be  translated  'while  Cicero  and 
Antonius  were  consuls'  or  '  in  the  consulship  of  Cicero  and 
Antonius'  So  *  in  my  consulship  '  is  in  Latin  '  me  consule.' 
In  turning  these  ablatives  absolute  into  clauses  we  must  of 
course  supply  a  part  of  the  verb  '  to  be/ 

The  ablative  absolute  is  so  called,  because  it  does  not 
depend  so  closely  as  other  ablatives  on  any  particular  word, 
though,  being  equivalent  to  an  adverbial  clause,  it  really 
qualifies  the  principal  verb  of  the  sentencei 

Exercise  6. 

1 .  Brutus,   who  *  ordered  2  his  own  sons  to  be  3  beheaded, 
was  a  4  man  of  wonderful  firmness. 

2.  We  know  that  a  great  loss  was  inflicted  on  the  state 
in  the  consulship  of  Varro  and  Paullus. 

3.  We   have  need  of  the  help  of  your  father,   who    is 
considered  a  general  of  the  greatest  skill. 

4.  Scipio  *  retired^  first   to  the  river   Po,   thence,    *when 
Hannibal  ^ followed,  to  Placentia. 

5.  He  bade  his  men  be  of  a  brave  spirit,  lest  they  should 
exchange  their  liberty  for  slavery. 

6.  Horace  writes  that  in  the  consulship  of  Plancus  he  was 
still  warm  with  youth. 

7.  [There]  was  in  the  army  a  4  man  of  remarkable  swift- 

> 

1  See  n.  3,  p.  55.  2  Suns. 

3  Say  '  to  be  smitten  with  the  axe.'  *  Vir. 

5  Me  recip-io  (-ere,  recep-i,  -turn),  I  retire,  lit.  I  take  myself  back. 

6  When  a  clause  is  printed  in  italics  in  this  and  the  following  exercises, 
turn  it  by  an  ablative  absolute. 

7  I.e.  '  was  following.' 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  65 

ness  of  ^foot,  to  whom  the  surname  Cursor  had  been  given 
by  the  soldiers. 

8.  Having  given  hostages,  the  conquered  were  received 
into  alliance  on  fair  terms. 

9.  He  said  that  those,  who  had  2  shown  themselves  men 
of  courage,  were  worthy  of  rewards. 

10.  Never,  while  I  am  alive,  shall  so  great  a  wrong  be 
borne  with  patience. 


Exercise  7. 

1.  When  Hasdrubal  had  been  killed,  Hannibal  is  said  to 
have  despaired  3  of  the  fortune  of  Carthage. 

2.  Having  routed  the  enemy,  the  soldiers  with  one  rush 
gained  possession  of  the  camp. 

3.  *A  certain  centurion,  a  man  of  great  valour,  '"inspired 
our  men  with  6  courage  by  his  7  words. 

4.  When  Numa   was  king,  the    Romans  enjoyed  peace 
for  many  years. 

5.  These   things    were    done   in   your    consulship,   many 
years  before  the  death  of  your  brother. 

6.  He  said  that  his  son  was  a  boy  of  great  spirit,  and 
was  becoming  much  stronger. 

7.  The  8  more  you  9  urge  this  boy  on,  the  more  sluggish 
he  becomes. 


1  Use  the  plural.  2  See  p.  26,  n.  i. 

3  De.  *  Quidam,  quaedam,  quoddam. 

5  Say  '  put  courage  into  our  men.'     In-jic-io,  -ere,  -jec-i,  -turn,  I  put 
into. 

6  Animus.  7  Dict-um,  -i.  8  See  p.  58,  n.  i. 
9  Incit-o,  -are,  I  urge  on. 

F 


66  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

8.  While  you  are  1  safe,  2  [there]  is  still  hope  that  the  enemy 
3  may  be  conquered. 

9.  Those  who  are  of  moderate  ability  have  need  of  4  the 
greater  diligence. 

i  o.    While  the  consul  was  saying  5  this,  the  soldiers  kept 
their  eyes  fixed  6  on  the  ground  for  shame. 


SECTION    5.     On   the    ablative   and   locative   of  place 
where,  and  the  ablative  of  time  when. 
Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Philippus  Neapoli  est,  Lentulus  Puteolis. 
Philippus  is  at  Naples^  Leniulus  at  Puteoli. 

2.  Tabernae  tota  urbe  clauduntur. 

The  shops  are  closed  in  the  whole  city. 

3.  Tabernae  in  urbe  clauduntur. 
The  shops  are  closed  in  the  city. 

4.  Quid  Romae  faciam  ? 
What  am  I  to  do  at  Rome  ? 

5.  Is  habitat  Mileti. 
He  dwells  at  Miletus. 

6    Caesaris  virtus  domi  militiaeque  cognita  est. 
Caesar's  virtue  was  known  at  home  and  in  war. 

7.  Latina  porta  ingressus  est. 
He  entered  by  the  Latin  gate. 

8.  Hieme  omnia  bella  conquiescunt. 
In  winter  all  wars  rest. 

1  Salv-us,  -a,  -um. 

2  The  expression  '  there  is  hope '  is  equivalent  to  a  verb  of  thinking. 

3  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  2,  n.  i.  *  Say  'by  that  the  greater.' 
5  Say  { these  things.'  6  In  with  accusative. 


ON  THE   ABLATIVE.  6j 

9.  Quicquid  est  biduo  sciemus. 

Whatever  it  is  we  shall  know  in  two  days. 
In  the  first  six  sentences,  the  words  '  Neapoli/  '  Puteolis,' 
'  tota  urbe/  '  in  urbe,'  '  Romae,'  '  Mileti/  '  domi  militiaeque/ 
answer  the  question  'where*'  Just  as  the  accusative  of 
the  name  of  a  town  is  used  without  a  preposition  in  answer 
to  the  question  '  whither  ? '  so  the  ablative  of  the  name 
of  a  town  is  used  without  a  preposition,  as  in  Sentence  i,  in 
answer  to  the  question  '  where  ? '  With  any  other  word, 
a  preposition  (generally  'in/  sometimes  *  ad,'  ' at']  should, 
as  a  rule,  be  used,  as  in  Sentence  3,  but  the  preposition  is 
left  out  when  the  noun  denoting  the  place  is  qualified  by 
the  adjective  'totus/  as  in  Sentence  2,  and  in  certain  other 
expressions.  In  poetry,  the  preposition  is  often  left  out 
where  it  would  be  used  in  prose.  In  Sentences  4,  5,  and  6, 
'  Romae,'  '  Mileti,'  '  domi,'  '  militiae,'  are  not  in  the  genitive, 
but  in  a  case  called  the  locative  (from  '  locus,'  '  a  place '), 
which  was  used  in  Latin  in  very  early  times  to  express 
the  place  where  a  thing  was  done,  but  had  nearly  fallen 
into  disuse  before  the  times  of  the  chief  Latin  writers,  its 
place  being  supplied  by  the  ablative  for  all  words  except 
names  of  towns  in  the  singular  number  of  the  first  and 
second  decknsions  (and  a  few  of  the  third),  and  the  words 
'  domus  '  (home),  '  rus  '  (the  country)^  '  bellum  '  (war), 
'militia'  (war),  'humus'  (the  ground).  Of  these  words 
the  locatives  '  domi '  (at  home),  '  ruri '  (in  the  country}, 
'  belli,'  '  militiae J '  (in  war), '  humi '  (on  the  ground),  are  used. 
It  will  be  seen  that  the  locative  case  ends  in  ae  in  the  first 
declension,  in  i  in  the  second  and  third.  Instances  of 


1  The  locatives  '  belli '  and  '  militiae  *  should,  however,  only  be  used 
when  coupled  with  '  domi.' 

F  2 


68  INTRODUCTION  TO   LATIN  SYNTAX. 

locatives  of  names  of  towns  of  the  third  declension  are 
'  Tiburi/  '  Carthagini.' 

We  see,  then,  that  in  answer  to  the  question  '  where  ? ' 
the  locative  case  (ending  in  ae  or  i)  is  used  for  names  of  towns 
of  the  first  and  second  declensions,  singular  number,  and  for 
the  words  *  domus'  '  rus,'  '  bellum'  '  militia]  '  humus ' :  the 
ablative  without  a  preposition  for  any  other  name  of  a  town, 
or  for  a  noun  qualified  by  the  adjective  '  totus ' :  but  that, 
with  these  exceptions,  a  preposition  is  generally  used. 

The  prepositions  mostly  used  in  English  in  answer  to 
the  question  '  where  ? '  are  '  in '  and  *  at.'  '  On '  and  '  by ' 
are  also  used,  as  c  on  the  ground,'  '  by  land  and  sea.' 

Caution.  Be  careful  to  distinguish  between  the  place 
where  something  is  done  and  trie  place  to  which  somebody  goes. 
This  caution  is  the  more  necessary,  as  we  often  inaccurately 
use  the  word  'where'  with  the  meaning  of  'whither/  as 
'  Where  are  you  going  ? '  Remember  that  '  where  '  properly 
means  '  in  what  place,'  '  whither/  '  to  what  place.'  For  the 
way  to  express  the  place  to  which  somedody  goes  in  Latin, 
see  Chap,  iii,  Sect.  4. 

In  Sentence  7,  the  words  '  Latina  porta '  answer  the  ques- 
tion '  by  what  way  ? '  The  way  by  which  a  person  goes 
may  be  looked  upon  as  a  means  by  which  he  goes,  and  in 
answer  to  this  question  the  ablative  is  used  without  a  pre- 
position. 

In  Sentence  8,  '  hieme '  answers  the  question  '  when  ? '  In 
English,  we  sometimes  use  the  preposition  'in/  sometimes 
'  on/  '  at/  or  '  by/  as  '  on  the  third  day/  '  at  *  even/  '  by 
night ' ;  sometimes  no  preposition  at  all,  as  '  last  year  we 
went  to  the  sea-side.' 

In  Sentence  9,  '  biduo  '  answers  the  question  '  within  what 
time  ? '  In  English  we  use  the  preposition  *  in '  or  '  within.' 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  69 

We  see,  then,  that  the  ablative  is  used  without  a  preposition 
in  answer  to  the  questions  '  when  ? '  and  '  within  what  time  ? ' 

Exercise  8. 

1.  He  said  that  he  had  stayed  many  years  in  that  town, 
and  had  there  been  taught  the  Greek  language. 

2.  This  man  will  do  the  same  things  at  Athens,  las  he 
used  to  do  at  home. 

3.  The  Gauls  had  crossed  into  Italy  by  mountain  passes 
two  hundred  years  2  before  they  came  to  Rome. 

4.  The  consul,  having  recovered  the  hostages,  who  were 
being  kept  at  Luceria,  returned  home. 

5.  The  Romans,  with  Scipio  for  leader,  conquered  the 
Carthaginians  in  the  second  Punic  war. 

6.  3  What  was  done  on  that  day  at  Corinth  *  was  known 
in  the  country  within  a  few  days. 

7.  He  says  that,  when  this  news  had  been  brought,  there 
was  the  greatest  confusion  in  the  whole  camp. 

8.  Next  day  the  bodies  of  the  slain,  which  had  been  left 
on  the  ground,  were  buried  with  the  greatest  care. 

9.  He  performed  with  energy  all  the  duties  of  a  king 
both  at  home  and  in  war. 

10.  5  When   the   Romans  had  entered  the  pass   by    6  one 
way,  they  perceived   that  they  could   not   go   out   by   the 
other. 

1  Say  <  which.' 

3  Remember  that  the  word  '  before '  may  be  either  a  preposition 
(governing  a  noun)  or  an  adverb  (qualifying  a  verb)  or  a  conjunction 
(introducing  a  clause),  and  be  careful  to  distinguish  between  these  three 
uses  in  turning  into  Latin.  The  same  remark  applies  to  the  word  '  after.' 

3  See  Chap,  iv,  Ex.  7,  n.  8.  *  Cog-nosc-o,  -ere,  -novi,  -nitum. 

5  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  5,  nn.  i  and  2.      6  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  4,  n.  2. 


70  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

Exercise  9. 

1.  Having   stayed   at  Ephesus  many   days,   in  the  third 
month  he  went  away  into  the  country. 

2.  He  promised  me  that  he  and  his  sister  would  visit  me 
at  home. 

3.  He  said  that  these  things  had  been  done  at  Rome  in 
his  consulship. 

4.  !  When  he  had  stayed  a  few  days  in  Asia,  he  heard  that 
his  brother  was  returning  home. 

5.  Two  hours  after  the  battle  it  was  announced  that  the 
enemy  were  advancing  into  our  territory,  and  would  arrive 

2  at  Alba  within  a  few  days. 

6.  The  more  fiercely  the  enemy  *  fought,  the  more  stub- 
bornly 3  were  they  resisted. 

7.  He  was  already  of  a   cheerful    countenance,    for   he 

3  believed  that  on  the  next  day  he  would  sup  at  Naples. 

8.  Having  taken  this  town,  the  consul  returned  into  Cam- 
pania by  the  same  way  by  which  he  had  set  out  six  days 
before. 

9.  That  year  there  was  a  great  pestilence  in  the  whole 
province,  both  in  the  country  and  in  the  towns. 

10.  He  4^z'^that  he  would  *not  go  to  the  help  of  those, 
who  had  5  shown  themselves  unworthy  of  pity. 


SECTION  6.     On  the  ablative  of  respect. 

Sentences  to  be  learned : 
i.  Angor  animo. 

/  am  distressed  in  mind. 

1  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  5,  n.  2.  2  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  4,  n.  6. 

3  Imperfect.  *  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  i,  n.  i. 

5  See  p.  26,  n.  i. 


OA?  THE   ABLATIVE.  71 

2.  Ennius,  ingenio  maximus,  arte  rudis. 
Ennius,  mighty  in  genius,  in  art  is  rude. 

3.  Amor  et  melle  et  felle  est  fecundissimus. 
Love  is  very  fruitful  both  in  honey  and  in  gall. 

4.  Sensu  caret 

He  is  without  feeling. 

5.  Gravius  est  spoliari  fortunis  quam  non  augeri  dig- 

nitate. 

//  is  a  more  serious  thing  to  be  robbed  of  one's  property 
than  not  to  be  loaded  with  honour. 

Very  similar  to  the  use  of  the  ablative  denoting  '  place 
where'  is  its  use,  as  in  Sentences  i  and  2,  qualifying  a  verb 
or  adjective,  in  answer  to  the  question  '  z 'n  what  respect}' 
As  we  saw  (Chap,  iii,  Sect.  5)  that  the  accusative  of  respect, 
which  is  chiefly  used  in  poetry,  might  be  said  to  answer 
the  question  '  how  far  ? '  so  the  ablative  of  respect,  which 
is  much  commoner  in  prose,  may  be  said  to  answer  the 
question  '  where  ? '  In  translating  this,  the  preposition  '  in ' 
is  generally  used  in  English. 

The  ablative  depending  on  a  verb  or  adjective  expressing 
abundance  or  its  contrary,  comes  under  this  head.  Thus, 
in  Sentence  3,  the  words  '  melle  '  and  '  felle '  show  us  in  what 
respect  love  is  fruitful,  while  '  sensu '  in  Sentence  4,  shows  in 
•what  respect  someone  is  in  want  *.  In  English,  with  a  verb 
or  adjective  expressing  abundance,  we  sometimes  use  the 
preposition  '  with/  as  '  the  sea  teems  with  fish/  sometimes 

1  The  ablative  depending  on  a  verb  or  adjective  expressing  abundance, 
or  a  verb  of  enriching,  may  also  be  explained  as  an  ablative  of  instru- 
ment :  while  that  depending  on  a  verb  of  depriving  may  be  brought 
under  the  head  of  the  ablative  of  separation,  which  is  treated  in  the  next 
Section. 


72  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

1  in/  as  '  a  land  rich  in  corn,'  sometimes  '  of/  as  '  a  purse 
full  of  money.'  In  translating  an  ablative  depending  on 
a  word  expressing  the  contrary  to  abundance,  we  sometimes 
use  the  preposition  'of/  as  'he  is  in  want  of  money'; 
sometimes  '  in/  as  '  wanting  in  courtesy ' ;  often  we  render 
in  English  by  a  transitive  verb,  as  'to  want/  'to  lack.' 
'  Careo '  is  generally  translated  '  I  am  without/ 

We  sometimes  find  the  genitive  instead  of  the  ablative 
depending  on  a  verb  or  adjective  expressing  abundance 
or  its  contrary,  but  the  ablative  is  commoner,  at  least  in 
prose. 

In  the  same  way  (i.  e.  as  an  ablative  of  respect)  we  may 
explain  the  use  of  the  ablative,  as  in  Sentence  5,  to  denote 
that  with  which  a  person  (or  thing]  is  enriched  (dignitate), 
or  that  of  which  he  (or  if)  is  deprived  (for turn's)*.  Verbs 
of  enriching  and  depriving  are  of  course  transitive,  and 
take  also  an  accusative  denoting  the  person  (or  thing)  err- 
riched  or  deprived. 

Exercise  10. 

1.  We  know  that  some  men,  distinguished  in  genius,  have 
been  of  low  stature. 

2.  They  will  be  robbed  of  those    standards,  which   our 
soldiers  have  always  preserved  with  the  greatest  care. 

3.  Many   wrongs   must   be   endured   by  those,   who  are 
without  friends. 

4.  We  are  fighting  with  a  nation  like  ourselves  in  speech 
and  manners. 

5.  He   said  that  the  king  had  wrongly  deprived  him  of 
those  honours,  which  were  his  by  right. 

6.  We  cannot  buy  for  money  that  wisdom  which  we  need. 

1  See  note,  p.  71. 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  73 

7.  The  Greeks  flourished  most  in  literature,  the  Romans 
in  war. 

8.  We  have  been  deprived  by  force  of  those  arms,  which 
we  had  used  for  many  years. 

9.  The  enemy  are  without  all  those  things,  of  which  there 
is  need  lfor  war. 

10.  He   said   that   the   town   was    being   furnished    with 
supplies,  with  which  it  was  already  2  well  stocked. 

Exercise   11. 

1.  He  said  that  those,  who  had  deprived  the  enemy  of  this 
assistance,  were  worthy  of  the  3  highest  praise. 

2.  He  says   that  our  men   are  without   many  things,  in 
which  the  enemy  4  are  strong. 

3.  The  temples  have  been  spoiled  by  the  enemy  of  those 
riches,  of  which  our  ancestors  gained  possession  by  their 
valour. 

4.  The  enemy  4  are  strong  in  land  forces,  but  our  ships 
6  are  a  good  deal  better  5  equipped. 

5.  Since  we  are  without  meat,  we  will  feed  on  bread. 

6.  Having  performed  this  duty  badly,  he  was  deprived  of 
his  office. 

7.  Having  conquered  the  enemy  in  battle,  he  6  knew  not 
how  to  use  his  victory. 

8.  He  said  that  this  man,  though  rich  in  slaves,  7  was  in 
want  of  money. 


1  Ad.  2  Refertus,  part,  from  refercio. 

3  See  Chap,  v,  Ex.  5,  n.  2.  *  Val-eo,  -ere,  I  am  strong. 

5  Perfect.     The  present  would  mean  '  are  being  equipped.' 

6  Nesc-io,  -ire,  I  know  not.     '  How '  is  not  to  be  expressed  in  Latin. 

7  Eg-eo,  -ere,  I  am  in  want  of. 


74  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

9.  He  said  that,  if  that  were  done,  he  should  be  bereft  of 
all  his  children  on  one  day. 

10.  While  I  was  consul,  the  city  was  filled  with  the  spoils 
of  the  enemy. 

SECTION  7.  On  the  ablatives  of  place  whence,  separa- 
tion, and  origin. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Demaratus  fugit  Corintho. 
Demaratus  fled  from  Corinth . 

2.  Domo  venit. 

He  comes  from  home. 

3.  Rure  venit. 

He  comes  from  the  country. 

4.  Ex  urbe  venit. 

He  comes  from  the  city  (strictly  '  out  of  the  city  '). 
.-;.  Camillus  dictatura  se  abdicavit. 

Camillus  resigned  (lit.    declared  himself  away  from) 
the  dictatorship. 

6.  L.  Brutus  civitatem  dominatu  regio  liberavit. 
L.  Brutus  freed  the  state  from  the  rule  of  kings. 

7.  Atreus  Pelope  natus,  Tantalo  prognatus  est. 
Atreus  was  born  of Pelops,  descended  from  Tantalus. 

In  the  first  four  of  these  sentences  the  words  '  Corintho,' 
'  domo/  '  rure,'  '  ex  urbe,'  answer  the  question  '  whence  ? '  i.e. 
'from  what  placet'  Notice  that  the  preposition  is  omitted 
in  Latin  with  names  of  towns,  and  with  the  words  '  domo ' 
and  '  rure/  just  as  it  is  in  answer  to  the  questions  '  whither  ? ' 
and  '  where  ? '  With  other  words  a  preposition  ('  ab/  'from} 
1  ex,'  '  out  of,'  or  '  de/  '  down  from  ')  is  generally  used,  as  in 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  75 

Sentence  4.  With  the  name  of  a  country,  '  from '  should  be 
translated  'ex/  as,  when  we  say  'he  comes  from  Italy/  we 
really  mean  'he  comes  out  of  Italy.'  '  Ab  Italia  venit' 
would  mean  '  he  comes  from  the  borders  of  Italy.' 

In  Sentences  5  and  6,  the  words  'dictatura/  'dominatu 
regio/  answer  the  question  'from  whatl'  With  verbs  ex- 
pressing separation  from  a  thing,  the  preposition  signifying 
'  from '  need  not,  as  a  rule,  be  repeated  in  Latin,  when  it  is 
already  contained  in  the  verb,  as  in  Sentence  5,  where 
'  abdicavit '  contains  the  preposition  '  ab ' ;  though  there  are 
some  verbs  containing  '  ab/  c  de/  or  '  ex/  with  which  it  is 
more  usual  to  repeat  the  preposition. 

There  are  also  some  verbs,  not  containing  a  preposition  in 
themselves,  which  may  take  an  ablative  without  a  preposition, 
denoting  that  from  which  something  is  separated,  as  in 
Sentence  6.  Among  these  are  'libero/  '  / set  free'  '  solvo/ 
1 1  loose'  'levo/  '/  relieve'  'arceo/  '/  keep  off,'  'moveo/ 
'  /  move}  ' pello/  (  / drive,'  *  cedo/  '  / retire',  *  vaco/  '  /  am 
free'.  Remember  that  such  of  these  verbs  as  are  transitive 
will  also  take  an  accusative  denoting  the  object.  An 
ablative  without  a  preposition  may  also  be  used  in  the  same 
sense  depending  on  an  adjective,  as  '  liber  cura/  'free  from 
care,'  '  vacuus  motu/  'free from  motion'. 

Note. — The  person  from  whom  something  is  taken  away 
must  be  denoted  by  a  dative,  not  an  ablative  (see  Chap,  iv, 
Sect.  2),  and  the  dative  is  sometimes  used,  but  chiefly  in 
poetry,  to  denote  the  thing  from  which  something  is  removed 
(see  Chap,  iv,  Sect,  i.) 

The  preposition  signifying  'from'  is  often  omitted  in 
poetry  where  it  would  be  expressed  in  prose,  both  in  express- 
ing '  place  whence '  and  with  verbs  expressing  separation 
from  a  thing. 


7 6  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

In  Sentence  6,  the  -words  '  Pelope '  and  '  Tantalo '  answer 
the  question  'from  whom  ? '  The  ablative  is  used  in  answer 
to  this  question,  with  or  without  a  preposition,  depending  on 
a  verb  expressing  birth,  where  in  English  we  use  the  prepo- 
sition '  of '  or  '  from/  This  is  called  the  ablative  of  origin. 


Exercise  12. 

1.  He  arrived  ^  in  the  city  from  the  country  a  few  days 
before  I  started  from  home. 

2.  He  said  that  by  this  decree  the  soldiers  had  been  shut 
out  from  all  hope  of  pardon. 

3.  This  man,  born  of  an  illustrious  father,  was   himself 
considered  a  general  of  the  greatest  skill. 

4.  They  hoped  that  we  should  free  them  from  the  slaver)', 
which  they  had  endured  for  many  years. 

5.  He  2  removed  from  Athens  to  Rome,  for  he  3  preferred 
to  live  in  Italy  [rather]  than  in  Greece. 

6.  Nero  came  from  Apulia  to  Umbria  by  the  sea  coast  in 
seven  days. 

7.  P.  Claudius,  having  lost  an  excellent  fleet,  was  com- 
pelled to  resign  his  consulship. 

8.  When   the   consul  had  been    killed,    the   soldiers    were 
scarcely  able  to  keep  off  the  enemy  from  the  gate. 

9.  He  returned  home  two  years  4  after  I  5  left  the  city. 

10.  Varro,  whom  the  Romans  had  made  consul  that  year, 
6  was  born  of  humble  parents. 


1  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  4,  n.  6.  2  Migr-o,  -are. 

3  Say  '  was  preferring.'  4  See  Ex.  8,  n.  2. 

5  Say  '  departed  out  of.'  6  Say  '  had  been  born.' 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  77 

Exercise  13. 

1.  This  man,  who   had  wished  to   sell   his   country  for 
money,  was  thrown  down  from  the  Tarpeian  rock. 

2.  He  promised  that  he  would  come  from  the  country  '  to 
visit  me  at  Athens. 

3.  This  man,  born  of  poor  parents,  had  always  lived  in 
the  country. 

4.  2  Though  he  was  worthy  of  a  greater  punishment,  he 
was  3  only  deprived  of  his  honours  and  sent  away  into  the 
country. 

5.  When   the   decemvirs   had  been    driven  from   office,    L. 
Valerius  and  M.  Horatius  were  created  consuls. 

6.  On  the  next  day  he  set  out  from  the  city  by  the  Latin 
gate. 

7.  He  said  that  he  had   set  out  from  home  many  days 
before  I  had  arrived  at  my  farm-house. 

8.  When   the   enemy  *  have   departed  from  Capua  I  will 
resign  my  office. 

9.  By  this  man's  death  my  wife  and  I  have  been  freed 
from  fear. 

10.  Tarquinius   Priscus,   whose    father   had    come    from 
Etruria  to  Rome,  reigned  at  Rome  for  many  years. 


SECTION  8.     On  the  ablative  of  thing  compared. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

i .  Nulli  flebilior  quam  tibi,  Vergili. 

To  none  more  a  cause  of  weeping  than  to  thee,  Vergil. 

1  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  4,  n.  i.  2  Etsi.  3  Tantum. 

4  See  Ex.  4,  n.  7. 


78  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

2.  Vilius  argentum  est  auro,  virtutibus  aurum. 
Silver  is  less  valuable  than  gold,  gold  than  virtues. 

3.  Puto  mortem  dedecore  leviorem. 
/  think  death  easier  than  disgrace. 

In  these  sentences  we  have  instances  of  two  different 
ways  of  expressing  '  than  '  after  a  comparative  in  Latin.  In 
Sentence  i,  irje  conjunction  'quam'  couples  the  nouns 
'  nulli '  and  '  tibi/  and,  as  two  nouns  coupled  by  a  conjunc- 
tion must  always  be  in  the  same  case,  '  tibi '  is  in  the  same 
case  as  '  nulli/  To  find  what  are  the  two  words  coupled  by 
4  quam '  in  any  sentence,  think  what  are  the  two  things 
compared. 

In  Sentences  2  and  3,  instead  of  '  quam '  and  a  noun  after 
it  in  the  same  case'  as  the  noun  to  which  it  is  coupled,  we 
have  the  noun  which  would  have  followed  '  quam '  put  in  the 
ablative,  the  word  *  quam  '  being  left  out.  Thus  '  auro  '  = 
'quam  aurum/  '  virtutibus '  =  ' quam  virtutes/  '  dedecore  '  = 
'  quam  dedecus.'  This  can  only  be  done  when  the  noun 
following  '  quam '  would  have  been  in  the  nominative,  as  in 
Sentence  2,  or  in  the  accusative,  as  in  Sentence  3. 

'  Quam  '  should  be  used  in  the  following  cases : 

(1)  if  the  noun  qualified  by  the  comparative  does  not 
denote  one  of  the  things  compared,  as  in  the  sent- 
ence 'Caesar   won  more  victories  than  Pompey/ 
where    '  more '   qualifies   '  victories/  but   the  com- 
parison is  between  Caesar  and  Pompey  : 

(2)  if  the  comparative  is  an  adverb,  not  an  adjective  : 

(3)  if  the  omission  of '  quam/  and  use  of  the  ablative, 
would  make  the  meaning  doubtful,  as  might  happen 
if  there  were    another  ablative  depending  on   the 
comparative   adjective.     (Thus  '  nihil  homine  dig- 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  79 

nius  dementia '  might  mean  either  '  nothing  is 
worthier  of  a  man  than  mercy/  or  '  nothing  is 
worthier  of  mercy  than  a  man/ 

Exercise  14. 

1.  He  *  said  that  he  had  seen  1  nothing  more  beautiful  than 
the  statues  of  Polycletus. 

2.  We  have  need  of  a  leader  rather  than  an  adviser. 

3.  He  says  that  those  who  died  "*for  their  country  have 
won  truer  glory  than  the  conquerors. 

4.  Nothing  is  worthier  of  a  great  conqueror  than  mercy. 

5.  He  said  that  our  men  would  fight  much  more  stub- 
bornly than  the  enemy. 

6.  I  think  that  the  soldiers  will  be  roused  by  desire  of 
praise  rather  than  of  plunder. 

7.  He  says  that  greater  losses  are  being  inflicted  on  us  by 
the  enemy  than  on  the  enemy  by  us. 

8.  This    state   has   produced    no    one    more   weighty   in 
influence  than  Africanus. 

9.  He  said  that  he  was  doing  this  from  desire  of  praise 
rather  than  from  fear  of  punishment. 

10.  In  this  man's  consulship  a  battle  was  fought  3  fiercer 
than  all  former  battles. 

Exercise  15. 

1 .  He  said  that  those,  who  had  perished  in  the  camp  by 
the  enemy's  weapons,  were  much  happier  than  those,  who  had 
returned  home  with  ignominy. 

2.  Cheered  with  the  hope  of  victory,  and  relying  on  the 

1  Say  '  denied  that— anything.'  a  Pro.  3  Ac-er,  -ris,  -re. 


80  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

skill  of  our  commander,  my  sons  and  I  were  fighting  with 
the  greatest  energy. 

3.  You  and  your  son,  who  *  showed  *  so  much  energy,  are 
in  my  opinion  worthier  of  reward  than  of  punishment. 

4.  Having  left  six  cohorts  for  the  defence  of  this  city,  he 
hastened  into  Samnium  by  the  shortest  way. 

5.  Phidippides  ran  from  Athens  to  Sparta  in  two  days,  3  to 
ask  the  Lacedaemonians  for  help  against  the  Persians. 

-6.  I  do  not  think  that  any  one  was  ever  loaded  with  more 
honours  by  the  Senate  than  you. 

7.  He  said  that  his  brother,  a  man  of  great  foresight,  had 
foretold  this  calamity  many  years  before. 

8.  The  statue,  which  was  about  fifty  paces  distant,  seemed 
larger  than  a  man. 

9.  Let  us  exchange  the  corn,  with  which  our  land  abounds, 
for  wool,  of  which  we  have  need. 

10.  Tarquinius  said  that  he  would  4  seek  to  regain  by  force 
the  kingdom,  from  which  he  had  been  unjustly  expelled. 

Exercise  16. 

1.  In  that  year  there  was  a  great  fire  in  London,  where 
almost  all  the  houses  5  were  built  of 6  wood. 

2.  This  man,  born  of  distinguished  parents,  was  entirely 
without  talent. 

3.  No  one  ever  performed  the  duties  of  a  commander  more 
wisely  than  this  man,  whom  you  wish  to  deprive  of  his  office. 

4.  They  said  that  those,  who  had  released  them  from  this 
fear,  were  more  like  allies  than  enemies. 

1  Ut-or,  -i,  usus  sum.  2  Tant-us,  -a,  -urn. 

3  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  4,  n.  i.  *  Repet-o,  -ere,  -ivi,  -itum. 

5  Say  '  had  been  built.'  6  Trab-es,  -um  (timbers). 


ON  THE  ABLATIVE.  8 1 

5.  While  my  father  was  alive  I  used  to  live  at  Athens; 
when  he  was  dead  I  *  removed  from  Greece  to  Italy^ 

6.  Tarquinius  and  his  wife  enjoyed  for  several  years  the 
kingdom,   of   which   they  had   gained  possession  by  their 
crimes. 

7.  No  one  had  ever  been  more  successful  than  Pompey, 
who  was  made  general  that  year. 

8.  The  2  more  you  threaten  these  men,  the  less  you  are 
obeyed. 

9.  He  3  said  that  this  state  had  produced  3  no  one  more 
skilled  in  warfare  than  Caesar. 

10.  Do  you  4  not  think  that  those  who  employed  such  arts 
are  worthier  of  punishment  than  of  praise  ? 

1  See  Ex.  12,  n.  2.  2  See  p.  58,  n.  i. 

*  See  Ex.  14,  n.  i.  *  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  2,  n.  2. 


CHAPTER    VI. 
ON  THE  GENITIVE. 

SECTION  1.      On  the  genitives  of  the  maker  or  pos- 
sessor, quality,  and  value. 

Sentences  to  be  learned : 

1.  Polycleti  signa  plane  perfecta  sunt. 
Polycktus  statues  are  quite  perfect. 

2.  Singulomm  opes  sunt  divitiae  civitatis. 

The  resources  of  individuals  are  the  riches  of  the  state. 

3.  Respublica  mea  unius  opera  salva  erat. 
The  state  was  saved  by  my  single  exertions. 

4.  Aves  fetus  adultos  suae  ipsorum  fiduciae  permittunt. 
Birds  entrust  their  grown  young  ones  to  their  own  self- 
reliance. 

5.  Ingenui  vultus  puer  ingenuique  pudoris. 

A    boy   of  a    high-bred  countenance    and  high-bred 
modesty. 

6.  Voluptatem  virtus  minimi  facit. 

Virtue  makes  pleasure  of  very  small  account. 

In  Sentences  i  and  2  we  have  three  genitives,  '  Polycleti/ 
'  singulorum/  and  '  civitatis/  each  qualifying  a  noun  in  the 
same  way  as  an  adjective  does.  'Polycleti'  denotes  the 
maker  of  the  statues,  '  singulorum '  and  '  civitatis '  the  pos- 
sessors of  the  riches.  Notice  that  the  genitive  may  be 


ON  THE   GENITIVE.  83 

rendered  in  English  either  by  a  possessive  case  (Polycletus '), 
or  by  the  use  of  the  preposition  '  of.'  Like  an  adjective,  a 
genitive  may  either  be  joined  immediately  to  the  noun  it 
qualifies,  as  in  these  sentences,  or  form  the  complement  to 
a  copulative  verb  (that  statue  is  Polycletus'). 

A  genitive  of  the  maker  or  possessor  is  called  a  subjective 
genitive,  because  it  may  be  turned  into  a  clause  with  the 
nominative  of  the  same  word  for  its  subject  noun.  Thus 
'Polycletus'  statues '  =  ' the  statues  which  Polycletus  made,' 
'the  resources  of  individuals '  =  ' the  resources  which  in- 
dividuals have.'  This,  which  is  the  commonest  use  of  the 
genitive,  will  present  no  difficulty,  and  instances  of  it  have 
of  course  occurred  in  previous  exercises. 

The  genitive  of  a  personal  pronoun  is  not  used  in  Latin 
to  denote  the  maker  or  possessor,  but  a  possessive  adjective 
is  used  instead.  Just  as  in  English  we  say  '  my  head,'  '  his 
head,'  etc.,  not  '  the  head  of  me,'  '  the  head  of  him,'  so  in 
Latin  we  must  say  '  caput  meum,'  not  '  caput  mei/  But,  as 
the  possessive  adjective  may  be  said  to  stand  for  the  genitive 
of  a  personal  pronoun,  a  genitive  is  sometimes  found  with 
it,  as  if  in  apposition  with  the  personal  pronoun  for  which  it 
stands.  Thus,  in  Sentence  3,  'mea  opera,'  *  by  my  exer- 
tions'  =  ' by  the  exertions  of  me  I  and  so  'mea  unius  opera '  = 
'  by  the  exertions  of  me  alone!  In  the  same  way,  in  Sentence 
4,  '  suae  fiduciae '  = '  to  the  self-reliance  of  them}  and 
*  suae  ipsorum  fiduciae '  = '  to  the  self-reliance  of  them  them- 
selves' The  genitives  most  commonly  used  in  this  way  are 
'  unius '  and  the  genitive  singular  or  plural  of  '  ipse.'  A 
possessive  adjective  with  '  unius '  may  sometimes  be  rendered 
by  turning  the  possessive  adjective  into  a  personal  pronoun 
with  '  of,'  and  translating  '  unius '  by  the  word  '  alone,'  quali- 
fying the  personal  pronoun,  (as  above  lby  the  exertions  of 

G  2 


#4  INTRODUCTION  TO   LATIN  SYNTAX. 

me  alone'}.  Or  we  may  keep  the  possessive  adjective  in 
English,  and  use  the  word  '  alone '  or  '  single/  qualifying 
the  noun  (' by  my  exertions  alone  j  '  by  my  single  exertions'}. 
The  genitive  of  '  ipse '  is  used  to  add  emphasis  to  the  pos- 
sessive adjective,  and  is  best  rendered  by  the  word  '  own,' 
qualifying  the  noun.  Notice  that  the  right  position  for  the 
genitive  in  Latin  is  after  the  possessive  adjective  and  before 
the  noun. 

In  Sentence  5,  the  words  '  ingenui  vultus '  and  '  ingenui 
pudoris '  qualify  '  puer '  like  adjectives,  and  answer  the  ques- 
tion ' of  what  kind!'  This  is  called  the  genitive  of  quality. 
Like  the  ablative  of  quality  (see  Chap,  v,  Sect.  4),  it  can  only 
be  used  if  the  qualifying  noun  is  itself  qualified  by  an  adjec- 
tive. '  A  man  of  courage '  is  neither  '  vir  fortitudine '  nor 
'vir  fortitudinis/  but  'vir  fortis'  ('a  brave  ma?t').  This  use 
of  the  genitive  may  be  brought  under  the  head  of  the  genitive 
of  the  possessor,  for,  by  a  slight  exercise  of  imagination,  a 
person  may  be  looked  upon  as  belonging  to  his  qualities, 
just  as  a  railway  porter  will  speak  of  '  the  gentleman  that 
belongs  to  this  luggage,'  meaning  the  person  to  whom  the 
luggage  belongs. 

In  Sentence  6,  the  genitive  '  minimi '  answers  the  question 
'  of  what  value?'  This  is  a  particular  use  of  the  genitive  of 
quality.  In  the  same  way  are  used  '  magni/  '  of  great  value  j 
'  pluris,'  '  of  more  value',  ' maximi '  and  '  plurimi,'  ' of  the 
greatest  value',  ' parvi/  ' of  small  value,'  '  minoris,'  ' of  less 
value}  '  tanti/  '  of  so  much  value,'  '  quanti/  '  of  how  much 
value!  (When  used  answering  to  one  another  'tanti — 
quanti '  may  be  translated  *  of  as  much  value  as!)  Any  of 
these  words  may  be  used,  agreeing  with  '  pretii '  understood, 
as  the  complement  to  a  copulative  verb,  or  to  a  factitive  verb 
such  as  'puto,'  '/  reckon,'  'habeo/  '  I  hold'  (i.e.  'consider'), 


ON  THE   GENITIVE.  85 

'facio,'  ' I  make'  (i.e.  ''consider'),  '  aestimo/  ' I  value',  etc. 
They  may  be  variously  translated  in  English.  Thus  '  magni 
puto'  ('habeo/  'facio/  or  'aestimo')  may  be  rendered  '/ 
reckon  (or  ' consider')  of  great  value'  (or  '  worth'  or  'im- 
portance'), '/  value  (or  'esteem'  or  'prize')  highly,  etc., 
*  parvi  puto'  ('habeo/  etc.),  '/  reckon  (or  'consider')  of 
small  value'  (' worth'  or  'importance'),  'I  make  (^consider' 
or  'hold')  of  small  account,'  etc. 

Exercise  1 . 

1.  That  year  Fabius  Maximus  was  created  dictator,  whom 
all  1 thought  a  leader  of  the  greatest  prudence. 

2.  He  said  that  you  were  bringing  this  calamity  on  your- 
self by  your  own  fault. 

3.  Money,  which  you  consider  of  the  highest  value,  is  of 
less  worth  than  wisdom. 

4.  He  says  that  his  father  is  reckoned  by  all  a  man  of 
prudence. 

5.  He  said  that  all  these  evils  would  be  brought  on  the 
state  by  your  crimes  alone. 

6.  I   know  that  your  father  was   a  man  of  the  greatest 
valour. 

7.  Leonidas,  who  2  commanded  the  Spartan  army  3  at  Ther- 
mopylae, valued  glory  much  more  highly  than  life. 

8.  We  will  trust   to   our  own  valour    rather  than  to   the 
enemy's  cowardice. 

9.  Your  safety  is  of  as  much  importance  to  me  as  my 
own  life. 

10.  He  said  that  my  single  vote  had  kept  off  this  calamity 
from  the  state. 


1  See  p.  26,  n.  2.  2  Prae-sum,  -esse, 

3  Thermopylae  is  the  name  of  a  pass,  not  of  a  town. 


-fui. 


86  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 


Exercise  2. 

1.  Pleasure,  which  lmosf  men  value  highly,  seems  of  very 
little  importance  to  the  wise. 

2.  He   says   that  this   happened  through  your  obstinacy 
alone. 

3.  He  said  that  your  brother  was  2  showing  himself  a  man 
of  great  firmness,  and  worthy  of  the  3  highest  praise. 

4.  A  man  of  courage  will  value  his  country's  welfare  much 
more  highly  than  his  own. 

5.  I  hope  that  this  man  will  be  taken  by  his  own  device. 

6.  The  old   man,  whose  wisdom  you   and   I  esteem   so 
highly,  has  not  been  asked  for  his  opinion. 

7.  He  said  that  great  loss  would  be  brought  on  the  enemy 
by  your  single  aid. 

8.  Next  year  the  Romans  made  Numa  Pompilius  king, 
who  4  was  reckoned  a  man  of  the  greatest  piety. 

9.  Those,  who  hold  learning  of  small   account,  deprive 
themselves  of  great  advantages. 

10.  They  felt  that  they  had  been  betrayed  by  their  own 
commander,  who  had  promised  them  5  such  great  rewards. 


SECTION  2.     On  the  genitive  qualifying  a  noun  omitted, 
and  on  '  interest '  and  '  refert/ 
Sentences  to  be  learned : 
i.  Ventum  erat  ad  Vestae. 

We  had  come  (lit.  it  had  been  come)  to  Vesta's  temple. 

1  Pler-ique,  -aeque,  -aque.  2  See  p.  26,  n.  i. 

3  See  Chap,  v,  Ex.  5,  n.  2.  4  See  p.  26,  n.  2. 

5  Tant-us,  -a,  -um. 


ON  THE   GENITIVE.  87 

2.  Cujusvis  hominis  est  errare. 
//  is  any  man  s  nature  to  err. 

3.  Est  adolescentis  majores  natu  vereri. 

//  is  the  duty  of  a  young  man  to  reverence  his  elders. 

4.  Tempori  cedere  habetur  sapientis. 

//  is  considered  the  part  (or  '  sign'  or  '  mar&')  of  a 
wise  man  to  yield  to  circumstances. 

5.  Interest  omnium  recte  facere. 

//  is  of  importance  to  all  to  act  rightly. 

6.  Et  mea  et  tua  interest  te  valere. 

//  is   of  importance  both  to  you  and  to  me  that  you 
should  be  well. 

7.  Quid  nostra  id  refert  ? 

What  does  that  matter  to  us  ? 

Sometimes  a  genitive  of  the  possessor  qualifies  a  noun 
omitted,  as  in  Sentence  i,  where  '  ad  Vestae '  stands  for  '  ad 
Vestae  templum/  and  in  Sentences  2,  3,  and  4,  where  the 
words  signifying  '  nature/  '  duty,'  and  '  part/  or  '  sign '  or 
'  mark/  have  to  be  supplied  as  complements  to  the  verbs 
'  est '  and  '  habetur/  which  are  used  impersonally.  In  turning 
sentences  similar  to  these  last  three  into  Latin,  remember 
that  the  word  'it'  is  not  to  be  expressed,  nor  the  word 
'  nature/  '  duty/  '  part/  '  sign/  or  '  mark.' 

The  genitive  used  with  '  interest/  as  in  Sentence  5,  is 
perhaps  to  be  explained  in  the  same  way  as  qualifying  the 
word  '  rem '  omitted.  Thus  '  interest  omnium '  would  stand 
for  '  inter  rem  omnium  est/  '  it  is  among  the  concerns  of 
all!  It  may  be  translated, '  it  concerns  all}  '  it  is  of  import- 
ance to  all,  or  '  it  is  important  to  all.'  '  Refert '  is  used  in 
exactly  the  same  way,  but  is  less  common.  This  is  perhaps 
a  corruption  of  '  rem  fert/  Thus  '  refert  omnium '  would 


88  INTRODUCTION  TO   LATIN  SYNTAX. 

stand  for  '  rein  omnium  fert,'  '  it  brings  the  advantage  of 
all/ 

As  the  possessive  adjectives  are  used  instead  of  the  geni- 
tives of  the  personal  pronouns,  we  might  naturally  expect  to 
find  '  interest  meam/  '  refert  meam/  for  '  it  is  of  importance 
to  me.'  This  '  meam  '  was,  however,  corrupted  into  *  mea ' ; 
so  that  the  place  of  the  genitive  of  a  personal  pronoun  de- 
pending on  'interest'  or  'refert'  is  supplied  by  what  looks 
like  the  ablative  singular  feminine  of  the  corresponding  pos- 
sessive adjective,  as  in  Sentences  6  and  7. 

In  the  last  sentence,  '  quid '  is  used  adverbially.  So  we 
may  have  '  nihil/  '  nothing!  used  as  an  adverb  qualifying 
'  interest '  or  '  refert.'  '  Quid  interest '  (or  '  refert ')  ?  may  be 
translated  '  what  does  it  matter  ? '  or  '  what  difference  does  it 
make  ? '  '  nihil  interest '  (or  '  refert '),  '  it  matters  nothing '  or 
'  it  makes  no  difference'.  The  preposition  '  to '  must  be  used 
in  translating  the  genitive  or  possessive  adjective.  These 
verbs  may  also  be  qualified  by  the  genitives  of  value  '  magni,' 
'  pluris,'  etc.  Thus  we  may  say  '  magni  mea  interest '  for 
'  it  is  of  great  importance  to  me'  Instead  of  such  a  genitive 
we  may  have  an  adverb  ('  magnopere/  ' greatly '/  '  magis.' 
'  morel  etc.) 

Caution.  '  //  is  of  importance  to  him '  must  of  course 
be  translated  '  interest  ejus/  as  '  suus '  can  only  be  used 
referring  to  the  subject.  So  also  '  it  is  of  importance  to 
them '  is  '  interest  eorum/  But  '  he  said  that  it  was  of  im- 
portance to  him'  is  ' dixit  sua  interesse ; '  ' they  said  thai  it 
was  of  importance  to  them',  '  dixerunt  sua  interesse/ 

Each  of  the  verbs  *  interest '  and  '  refert '  may  be  used 
either  with  a  neuter  pronoun  for  subject  noun,  as  in  Sentence 
7,  or  impersonally,  as  in  Sentences  5  and  6,  in  which  'case  it 
may  be  followed  by  an  infinitive,  as  in  Sentence  5,  or  an 


ON  THE    GENITIVE.  89 

accusative  with  infinitive,  as  in  Sentence  6.  Notice  the 
translation  of  the  accusative  with  infinitive  in  this  sentence, 
and  remember  that  in  such  sentences  '  should '  is  not  a  sign 
of  the  future,  but  the  present  is  the  right  tense  to  use.  In- 
stead of  the  accusative  with  infinitive,  'ut '  with  the  subjunctive 
may  be  used ;  in  which  case  the  rule  explained  in  Chap,  ii, 
Sect.  4.  holds  good  :  if  the  principal  verb  is  in  a  primary 
tense,  the  present  subjunctive  is  to  be  used,  if  the  principal 
verb  is  in  a  historic  tense,  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 

Exercise  3. 

1.  He  said  that  it  was  the  nature  of  a  wise  man  to  bear 
evil  fortune  with  fortitude. 

2.  He  *  says  that  this  is  l  not  less  important  to  the  State  than 
2  to  himself. 

3.  It  is  the  duty  of  boys  to  obey  their  own  parents. 

4.  It  concerns  both  us  and  the  3  rest  of  the  citizens  that  you 
should  be  spared. 

5.  It  is  a  sign  of  rashness  rather  than  bravery  to  *go  to 
meet  dangers  5 of  ones  own  accord. 

6.  He  says  that  this  concerns  himself  alone ;  but  it  con- 
cerns you,  citizens,  no  less  than  him. 

7.  Zeno,  who  presided  over  the  Stoics  for   many   years, 
thought  that  it  was  the  part  of  a  wise  man  to  make  pleasure 
of  very  small  account. 

1  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  I,  n.  i. 

2  Do  not  be  misled  by  the  rule  that  the  words  coupled  by  '  quam ' 
must  be  in  the  same  case.     Remember  that  a  possessive  adjective  is 
equivalent  to  a  genitive  case. 

3  Say  '  the  remaining  (reliqu-us,  -a,  -um),  citizens.' 

4  Occur-ro,  -rere,  -ri,  -sum.  5  Ultro. 


90  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

8.  Having   received   this    news,   he   answered   that    that 
mattered  nothing  to  him. 

9.  It  is  the  nature  of  a  good  man  to  consider  the  welfare 
of  others"  of  as  much  importance  as  his  own. 

10.  It  is  equally  important  to  me  and  to  the  soldiers  that 
the  enemy  should  be  conquered. 


Exercise  4. 

1.  It  is  the  part  of  a  good  commander  to  provide  for  the 
welfare  of  the  soldiers. 

2.  He  said  that  this  was  of  importance  to  him;  but  it  is 
no   less  important  to  the  soldiers  than  to  the  commander 
himself. 

3.  It  is  the  duty  of  a  good  soldier  to  value  the  welfare  of 
his  country  more  highly  than  his  own. 

4.  This  will  make  no  difference  to  those  who  have  re- 
mained in  the  country. 

5.  It  is   the  sign  of  a   fool  to   hold   learning  of  small 
account. 

6.  He  imposed  the  task  of  fortification  on  the  soldiers  of 
the  tenth  legion,  for  it  was  of  the  greatest  importance  to 
them  that  the  enemy  should  be  kept  off  from  the  camp. 

7.  It  is  the  nature  of  fools  to  consider  learning  of  less 
value  than  their  own  pleasure. 

8.  They  said  that  this  concerned  us  more  than  them. 

9.  It  is  considered  the  mark  of  a  good  soldier  to  prize 
glory  much  more  highly  than  rewards. 

10.  It  is  of  importance  not  only  to  the  king,  but  also  to 
you,  citizens,  that  the  enemy  should  be  resisted. 


ON  THE    GENITIVE.  91 

SECTION  3.     On  the  genitive  depending   on    partitive 
words,  and  the  genitive  of  material. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Gallorum  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae. 

The  Belgae  are  the  bravest  of  the  Gauls. 

2.  Sulla  centum  viginti  suorum  amisit. 
Sulla  lost  a  hundred  and  twenty  of  his  men. 

3.  Elephanto  beluarum  est  nulla  prudentior. 

Of  beasts,  none  is  more  sagacious  than  the  elephant. 

4.  Te  venire  uterque  nostrum  cupit. 
Each  of  us  wishes  you  to  come. 

5.  Satis  eloquentiae,  sapientiae  parum  est. 

There  is  enough  (of)  eloquence •,  too  little  (of)  wisdom. 

6.  Summus  mons  a  Labieno  tenebatur. 

The  top  of  the  mountain  was  occupied  by  Labienus. 

7.  Lapidum  imber  defluxit. 

A  shower  of  stones  has  fallen. 

In  the  first  four  of  these  sentences  the  genitives  'Gallorum/ 
'  suorum/  '  beluarum/  '  nostrum/  denote  each  a  number  of 
persons  or  things,  about  one  or  more  of  which  something  is  said. 

Such  a  genitive  may  depend 

(1)  on  a  comparative  ('  the  elder  of  the  two  ')  or  super- 

lative, as  in  Sentence  i,  '  Gallorum  fortissimi' : 

(2)  on  a  numeral,  whether   cardinal   (one,  two,  three, 

etc.),  as  in  Sentence  2, '  centum  viginti  suorum/  or 
ordinal  (first,  second,  third,  etc.) : 

(3)  on  any  pronoun  or  adjective  denoting  one  or  some  of 

a  number,  as  in  Sentence  3,  where  'beluarum 
nulla '  =  ' not  one  of  all  beasts,'  or  in  Sentence  4, 
'  uterque  nostrum/  '  each  (one)  of  us!  So  we 


92  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

may  have  a  genitive  with  words  signifying  '  many,' 
'  a  few/  and  the  like. 

[But  the  genitive  is  not  used  in  Latin,  as  we  sometimes 
use  'of  in  English  with  a  word  signifying  the  whole  of  a 
thing  or  of  a  number.  '  The  whole  of  Italy '  is  { tota  Italia,' 
'  all  of  us'  is  * nos  omnes/  or  '  omnes '  alone,  if  it  denotes 
the  subject  of  a  verb  in  the  first  person  plural.] 

A  word  which  has  a  genitive  depending  on  it  in  this  sense 
is  called  a  partitive  word,  because  it  denotes  a  part  put  of  a 
whole  number.  The  genitive  is  akin  to  the  genitive  of  the 
possessor,  as  a  part  may  naturally  be  looked  upon  as  belong- 
ing to  the  whole,  of  which  it  is  a  part. 

Notice  that  'nulla'  in  Sentence  3  is  feminine,  to  agree  with 
'  belua '  understood ;  the  partitive  word  taking  the  same 
gender  as  the  word  in  the  genitive. 

Notice  also  that  for  'of  us/  'of  you'  (plur.),  when  de- 
pending on  a  partitive  word,  the  forms  'nostrum'  and 
'  vestrum '  (not  '  nostri/  '  vestri ')  are  to  be  used,  as  in 
Sentence  4. 

A  partitive  adjective  may  of  course  be  used,  like  any  other 
adjective,  with  the  noun  it  qualifies  expressed  in  the  same 
case.  Thus  we  may  say '  fortissimi  Galli/  '  the  bravest  Gauls/ 
'  centum  milites/  '  a  hundred  soldiers/  '  nulla  belua/  '  no 
beast/  '  uterque  consul/  '  each  consul/ 

In  Sentence  5,  the  genitives  l  eloquentiae '  and  '  sapientiae  ' 
are  like  the  genitives  in  the  first  four  sentences,  except  that, 
instead  of  denoting  each  a  number  of  things,  each  denotes 
a  single  thing,  about  a  part  of  which  something  is  said.  Such 
a  genitive  may  depend  on  any  word  denoting  a  certain 
quantity,  which  may  be  either  (i)  a  word  like  'satis/ 
'  parum/  '  nimis/  '  nihil/  which  are  all,  when  used  in  this 
way,  indeclinable  nouns,  though  they  may  also  be  used  as 


ON  THE   GENITIVE.  93 

adverbs :    or  (2)  the  neuter  of  a  pronoun  or  adjective,  as 
'aliquid/  'multum/  'plus/  'plurimum/   'paulum/   'minus/ 

*  minimum/  '  nimium/  etc. 

The  partitive  word  and  the  genitive  are  most  commonly 
rendered  in  English  by  a  noun  and  adjective  in  agreement, 
as  in  the  above  sentence,  '  enough  eloquence]  ( too  little 
wisdom!  So  'nimis  (or  'nimium')  pecuniae '  = ' too  much 
money]  '  nihil  mali  '  =  'no  evil]  '  aliquid  voluptatis '  = '  some 
pleasure]  'multum  ('plus'  or  'plurimum')  caedis'='«tt«v$ 
('more'  or  'very  much')  slaughter]  '  paulum  ('minus'  or 

*  minimum ')    sapientiae '  = '  a    little   ('  less '   or    '  very   little ') 
wisdom!     Sometimes,  however,  the  genitive  may  be  literally 
translated,  as  '  aliquid  pristini  roboris/  '  something  of  his  old 
strength! 

Note  i. — If  a  word  denoting  a  certain  quantity  is  in  any 
case  except  the  nominative  or  accusative,  or  if  it  depends  on 
a  preposition,  it  should  be  used  as  an  adjective,  agreeing 
with  its  noun.  Thus  '  of  too  much  money '  is  '  nimiae 
pecuniae/ 

Note  2. — The  genitive  depending  on  a  word  of  quantity 
may  be  a  neuter  adjective,  as  '  nihil  veri ' ;  in  which  case  we 
may  either  render  the  genitive  by  a  noun,  and  the  word  of 
quantity  by  an  adjective  qualifying  it  ('  no  truth '),  or,  trans- 
lating the  word  of  quantity  as  a  noun,  render  the  genitive  by 
an  adjective  qualifying  it  ('  nothing  true ').  An  adjective  of 
the  third  declension  should  not  be  used  in  the  genitive  with 
a  word  of  quantity,  but  should  be  put  in  agreement  with  it, 
as  '  nihil  triste/  '  nothing  sad! 

In  Sentence  6,  the  words  '  summus  mons '  mean  '  the 
highest  part  of  the  mountain/  We  might  naturally  have 
expected  to  find  the  adjective  in  the  neuter,  with  the  noun 
in  the  genitive ;  but  the  words  *  summus/  '  highest]  '  imus/ 


94  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

1  lowest}  '  ceterus '  and  '  reliquus,'  '  remaining}  '  medius,' 
'  middle}  '  primus/  '  first}  '  extremus/  '  outermost '  or  '  last} 
and  some  other  superlatives,  when  placed  before  the  nouns 
they  qualify,  have  a  partitive  meaning.  Thus  'ima  vallis'  = 
1  the  bottom  of  the  valley}  'cetera  (or  'reliqua')  classis'= 
'  the  rest  of  the  fleet}  (  media  acies '  = '  the  centre  of  the  line 
of  battle}  'primum  agmen'  =  '  the  front  (or  '  beginning'}  of 
the  line  of  march}  l  extremum  ('  postremum/  '  ultimum/  or 
'  novissimum ')  agmen '  =  '/&?  rear  (or  l  end'}  of  the  line  of 
march!  When  these  adjectives  are  placed  after  the  nouns 
they  qualify,  they  have  no  such  partitive  meaning.  Thus 
'  via  media '  = '  the  middle  road' 

In  Sentence  7,  the  genitive  'lapidum'  denotes  the  material 
of  which  the  shower  consists.  This  differs  from  the  ablative 
of  material  (see  Chap,  v,  Sect.  3),  inasmuch  as  that  depends 
on  a  verb,  the  genitive  on  a  noun.  It  is  akin  to  the  genitive 
depending  on  a  partitive  word,  as  the  material  of  which 
a  thing  consists  may  be  regarded  as  a  whole,  of  which  the 
thing  is  a  part.  Sometimes  a  genitive  denoting  that  of  which 
a  thing  consists  is  added  to  a  noun  to  explain  it  in  much  the 
same  way  as  a  noun  in  apposition,  as  'honos  consulatus/ 
'  the  honour  (consisting)  of  the  consulship}  and  may  some- 
times even  be  rendered  as  such  in  English,  as  '  numerus 
trecentorum/  *  the  number  (consisting  of}  three  hundred! 

Exercise  5. 

1.  He  has  J  ordered  the  elder  of  you  to  go  to  Rome. 

2.  The  front  of  the  line  of  march  halted  at  the  bottom  of 
the  mountain. 

1  Usejubeo. 


ON  THE   GENITIVE.  95 

3.  He  said  that  all  of  you  had  *  shown  much  talkativeness, 
very  little  wisdom. 

4.  The  Persians,  who  had  2  taken  their  stand  in  the  centre 
of  the  line  of  battle,  captured  three  of  our  standards. 

5.  He  3  said  that 3  none  of  us  was  wiser  than  Socrates. 

6.  It  is  of  importance  both  to  us  and  to  the  rest  of  the 
citizens  that  the  general  should  have  enough  forces. 

7.  He  said  that  [there]  would  be  too  much  danger  in  that 
undertaking. 

8.  The  enemy  surprised  many  of  our  cohorts  4  on  the  top 
of  the  hill. 

9.  I  believe  that  [there]  was  nothing  true  in  the  whole  of 
his  speech. 

10.  Money,  which  5  most  of  you  value  highly,  is  of  less 
worth  than  a  mind  contented  with  its  own  lot. 

11.  It  is  the  mark  of  a  fool  to  have  more  confidence  than 
valour. 

Exercise  6. 

1.  This  war  was  e prepared  for  at  the  7  end  of  the  winter, 
finished  at  the  7  beginning  of  summer. 

2.  I  hope  that  you  will  say  something  useful ;  at  least  you 
will  say  nothing  false. 

3.  He  said  that  ten  of  us  had  been  8  sent  for  by  the  king  ; 
that  the  rest  of  the  captives  had  been  judged  worthy  of  death. 

4.  It  was   announced  that  those,  who  were   in  the  city, 
would  within  three  days  have  no  corn. 


1  Exhib-eo,  -ere.  2  Con-sist-o,  -ere,  -stiti. 

3  Say  '  denied  that  any  one.'  4  In.  5  See  Ex.  2,  n.  i. 

6  Par-o,  -are,  I  prepare  for,  transitive.  7  Use  adjectives. 

8  Arcess-o,  -ere,  -ivi,  -hum,  I  send  for,  transitive. 


g6  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

5.  The  whole  of  our  army  ran  down  from  the  top  of  the 
hill  to  the  bottom  of  the  valley. 

6.  Some  of  you  have  too   much    confidence,  others  too 
little  skill ;  all  of  you  are  men  of  too  much  rashness. 

7.  It  is  of  the  greatest  importance  to  us  that  the  soldiers 
should  have  more  corn. 

8.  It  is  important  to  all  that  the  bravest  of  you  should  be 
sent  to  the  camp. 

9.  *  One  of  my  sisters  will  go  to  Corinth,  the  other  will 
remain  a  whole  year  at  Athens. 

10.  He  said  that  the  enemy  had  less  ammunition  than  we, 
2  and  could  2  not  inflict  much  damage  on  our  men. 


SECTION  4.     On  the  objective    genitive    depending  on 
noun  or  adjective. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

r.  Nicias  tud  sui  memoria  delectatur. 

Nicias  is  delighted  with  your  remembrance  of  him. 

2.  Habetis  ducem  memorem  vestri. 
You  have  a  leader  mindful  of  you. 

3.  Volo  me  patris  mei  similem. 
I  wish  myself  like  my  father. 

4.  Animus  fuit  alieni  appetens. 

His  mind  was  desirous  of  another  s  wealth. 

5.  Miserrima  est  honorum  contentio. 
Striving  about  honours  is  most  miserable. 

6.  Consolantur  aegram  animi. 

They  console  the  woman  sick  at  heart. 

1  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  4,  n.  2.  2  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  4,  n.  i. 


ON  THE   GENITIVE.  97 

In  Sentence  i,  the  words  'with  your  remembrance  of  him' 
might  be  otherwise  expressed  'that  you  remember  him,' 
where  'him'  is  the  object  noun  to  the  verb  'remember: 
So  also  in  Sentences  2,  3,  and  4,  the  words  on  which  the 
genitives  depend  may  be  turned  into  transitive  verbs,  and  the 
genitives  into  their  object  nouns.  'Mindful  of  you'  =  'who 
remembers  you':  'like  my  father '=' one  who  resembles 
my  father1':  'was  desirous  of  another's  wealth '  =  ' desired 
another's  wealth.'  A  genitive  which  may  thus  be  turned 
into  an  object  noun  is  called  an  objective  genitive.  It  may 
depend  on  a  noun,  as  in  Sentence  i,  or  on  an  adjective,  as  in 
Sentences  2,  3,  and  4.  In  particular,  a  present  participle  may 
have  such  a  genitive  depending  on  it,  when  it  is  used  as 
a  mere  adjective,  i.  e.  when  it  describes  a  permanent  quality, 
as  in  Sentence  4  ('  alieni  appetens '),  and  not  a  particular  act 
done  at  some  one  time  ('mortuus  est  manus  ad  caelum 
extendens/  'he  died  stretching  out  his  hands  to  heaven'). 
A  participle  thus  used  may  often  be  rendered  by  an  English 
adjective,  as  above,  'desirous  of  another  s  wealfh' ;  sometimes 
by  a  noun,  as  '  amans  patriae/  '  a  lover  of  his  country ' ;  some- 
times by  several  words,  as  'patiens  frigoris/  'capable  of 
enduring  cold! 

Notice  that  the  genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns,  which, 
as  we  saw  above  (Sect,  i),  are  not  used  to  denote  the  maker 
or  possessor,  are  used  as  objective  genitives,  as  in  Sentences 
i  and  2 ;  and  notice  further  that  for  '  of  us,'  '  of  you '  (plur.), 
when  the  genitive  is  objective,  the  forms  '  nostri,'  '  vestri/  are 
used,  as  in  Sentence  2,  not  '  nostrum,'  '  vestrum/  which,  as  we 
saw  in  Sect.  3,  are  used  wi^Ji  partitive  words. 

1  '  Similis'-and  '  dissimilis '  may  be  used  either  with  a  genitive,  as 
here,  or  with  a  dative,  as  we  saw  in  Chap,  iv,  Sect.  i. 

H 


98  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

In  Sentence  5,  '  honorum  contentio'  =  '  de  honoribus  con- 
tendere/  As  a  preposition  is  seldom  used  depending  on 
a  noun,  a  genitive  is  sometimes  used  in  this  way,  where,  if 
the  noun  on  which  it  depends  were  turned  into  a  verb, 
a  preposition  would  be  used :  and  as  the  genitive  is  the  only 
case  that  can  be  used  qualifying  a  noun,  it  is  occasionally 
found  where  a  dative  or  ablative  without  a  preposition  would 
be  used,  if  the  noun  on  which  the  genitive  depends  were 
turned  into  a  verb.  So  '  vacatio  militiae '  = '  militia  vacare/ 
*  freedom  from  military  service ' ;  '  imperium  pelagi '  = '  pelago 
imperare/  '  rule  over  the  sea/  In  such  cases  care  will  be 
necessary  to  see  what  preposition  is  most  suitable  in  trans- 
lating the  genitive  into  English. 

In  Sentence  6,  the  genitive  '  animi '  is  used  just  like  an 
ablative  of  respect.  This  is  a  use  of  the  genitive  which  is 
chiefly  found  in  poets  and  late  writers,  but  the  word  '  animi ' 
is  so  used  in  writers  of  the  best  period,  both  with  adjectives, 
as  in  this  sentence,  and  with  verbs,  as  '  animi  pendeo/  '/  waver 
in  mind! 

Exercise  7. 

1.  Our  parents  will  be  delighted  by  our  care  of  them. 

2.  Of  all  animals  none  is  more  capable  of  enduring  toil 
than  the  horse. 

3.  He  said  that  you  had  1  shown  too  little  goodwill  in  this 
matter;  but  I  will  never  believe  that  you  were  so  forgetful 
of  us. 

4.  Having  read  this  letter,  he  said  that  he  2  wondered  at 
your  hatred  of  him. 

5.  That  man  seems  to  me  much  more  like  you  than  your 
own  brother. 

1  Praest-o,  -are.  2  Mir-or,  -ari,  I  wonder  at,  trans. 


ON  THE    GENITIVE.  99 

6.  I  think,  soldiers,  that  this  was  done  from  fear  of  you. 

7.  This  man,  whom  you  think  so  neglectful  of  me,  has 
always  been  considered  a  lover  of  himself. 

8.  Your  parents  will  rightly  be  angry  with  you  l  on  account 
of  your  neglect  of  them. 

9.  I  believe  that  znone  of  us  will  see  anything  like  this 
comet  within  the  3  next  thirty  years. 

10.  He  told  me  that  the  rest  of  the  allies,  blind  with  hatred 
of  us,  had  gone  to  the  help  of  the  enemy. 


SECTION  5.     On  verbs  that  take  a  genitive. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Romani  signorum  potiti  sunt. 

The  Romans  gained  possession  of  the  standards. 

2.  Mancipiis  locuples  eget  aeris  Cappadocum  rex. 

The  king  of  the  Cappadocians,  rich  in  slaves,  is  in 
want  of  coin. 

3.  Condemnamus  haruspices  stultitiae. 

We  condemn  soothsayers  (as  guilty]  of  folly. 

4.  Petillius  furti  absolutus  est. 
Petillius  was  acquitted  of  theft. 

5.  Res  adversae  admonent  nos  religionum. 
Adversity  reminds  us  of  religious  duties. 

6.  Jubet  mortis  te  meminisse  Deus. 
God  bids  thee  remember  death. 

7.  Nunquam  obliviscar  noctis  illius. 
Never  shall  I  forget  that  night. 

1  Use  a  preposition.      2  Nem-o,  ace.  -Tnem.      3  Proxim-us.  -a,  -urn. 
H  2 


100  INTRODUCTION  TO   LATIN  SYNTAX. 

8.  Dulces  moriens  rerhiniscitur  Argos. 
Dying,  he  remembers  sweet  Argos. 

9.  Arcadii,  quaeso,  miserescite  regis. 
Pity,  I  pray,  the  Arcadian  king. 

i  o.  Miseret  te  aliorum ;  tui  nee  miseret  nee  pudet. 
Thou  pitiest  others  ;  thou  neither pitiest  nor  art  ashamed 
of  thyself. 

The  genitives  in  these  sentences,  unlike  those  in  the 
former  examples,  depend  on  verbs. 

'  Potior/  '/  gain  possession'  '  egeo  '  and  '  indigeo,'  '/  am 
in  want,'  may  take  either  a  genitive,  as  in  Sentences  i  and  2, 
or  an  ablative,  as  we  saw  in  Chapter  v,  Sects.  3  and  6. 
So  also  verbs  signifying  '  to  fill '  sometimes  take  a  genitive 
instead  of  an  ablative,  denoting  that  with  which  a  thing  is 
filled. 

A  genitive  is  used,  as  in  Sentences  3  and  4,  with  verbs  of 
accusing,  condemning,  and  acquitting,  to  denote  the  crime  of 
which  a  person  is  accused,  pronounced  guilty  or  acquitted. 
In  translating  the  genitive  depending  on  a  verb  signifying 
'  to  condemn '  it  is  necessary  to  put  in  some  such  words  as 
'  on  a  charge '  or  '  as  guilty,'  as  in  Sentence  3.  Remember 
that  these  are  transitive  verbs,  and  take  also  an  accusative 
denoting  the  person  accused,  condemned,  or  acquitted. 

A  genitive  is  used,  as  in  Sentences  5,  6,  and  7,  with  verbs 
of  reminding,  remembering,  and  forgetting,  to  denote  that  of 
which  a  person  is  reminded,  or  that  which  one  remembers  or 
forgets.  Notice  that  the  person  reminded  is  denoted  by  the 
accusative  ('  nos  '  in  Sentence  5).  With  verbs  of  remember- 
ing and  forgetting,  the  genitive  must  be  translated  like  an 
object  noun,  without  any  English  preposition.  Indeed  with 
these  verbs  the  thing  remembered  or  forgotten  may  also  be 


ON  THE   GENITIVE.  IOI 

denoted  by  an  accusative  in  Latin,  as  in  Sentence  8,  where 
'  Argos '  is  ace.  plur.  from  ' Argi/ 

A  genitive  is  also  used,  as  in  Sentences  9  and  10,  with  the 
verbs  *  miseresco '  and  '  misereor/  '  /  pity  I  and  the  im- 
personal verbs  '  miseret/  '  piget/  '  taedet/  '  pudet/  '  paenitet/ 
to  denote  the  person  or  thing  on  account  of  which  one  feels 
pity,  disgust,  weariness,  shame,  or  repentance.  With  the 
verbs  signifying  '  to  pity/  the  genitive  must  be  translated  as 
an  object  noun,  without  preposition.  With  the  impersonal 
verbs  given  above,  the  person  who  feels  the  emotion  is  de- 
noted by  an  accusative.  In  translating,  the  impersonal  must 
be  turned  into  a  personal  verb,  of  which  the  word  in  the 
accusative  becomes  the  subject  noun.  Thus  '  miseret  te 
aliorum '='/&»<  pitiest  others'  [In  the  latter  part  of  this 
sentence,  '  te '  is  understood  a  second  time  with  '  miseret ' 
and  'pudet.']  So  'fratris  me  piget/  '/  am  disgusted  with 
my  brother' :  '  taedet  me  vitae,'  ' 1 am  weary  of  life' :  *  tui  te 
non  pudet/  '  thou  art  not  ashamed  of  thyself  :  '  paenitet  eum 
facti/  'he  repents  of  the  deed' 

With  the  verbs  'miseror'  and  '  commiseror/  '/  compas- 
sionate] i.e.  express  pity  for,  the  accusative,  not  the  genitive, 
is  used. 

For  '  of  us/  '  of  you '  (plur.),  when  depending  on  a  verb, 
the  forms  '  nostri/  '  vestri/  should  be  used. 

A  genitive  (of  the  same  kind  as  those  of  which  we  had 
examples  in  the  last  section)  may  be  used  depending  on  an 
adjective  corresponding  in  meaning  with  any  of  the  verbs 
that  take  the  genitive,  as  '  potens/  '  having  power  (over),' 
'  impotens/  '  without  control  (over),'  '  egenus/  '  in  ivant' 
'  plenus/  '_/«///  '  reus/  '  accused,'  '  sons '  and  '  noxius/ 
'guilty',  'insons'  and  '  innocens/  'innocent',  '  memor/ 
'  mindful',  '  immemor/  ' forgetful',  &c. 


102  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

Exercise  8. 

1.  I  think  that  this  circumstance  will  remind  them  of  us. 

2.  He   was  convicted   of  treason   l  by  means  of  his  own 
letter. 

3.  I  pity  those  who  gave  themselves   up  to    the  enemy 
much  2  more  than  those  who  were  killed  in  the  battle. 

4.  You  will  soon  forget  the  labours,  of  which  you  are  now 
weary. 

5.  I  do  not  remember  the  deed  of  which  you  say  that  you 
repent. 

6.  They  are  ashamed  of  their  allies,  who  are  giiilty  of  the 
greatest  crimes. 

7.  We  could  not  gain  possession  of  the  camp,  for  we  3  had 
too  little  strength. 

8.  He  told  me  that  you  were  innocent  of  those  crimes,  of 
which  you  were  accused. 

9.  I  am  disgusted  with  you,  who  are  accusing  your  own 
brother  of 4  such  baseness. 

10.  I  cannot  acquit  you  of  those  crimes  which  you  have 
committed   [while]  full  of  anger  and  without  control  over 
yourself. 

Exercise  9. 

1.  5He  will  be  reckoned  the  bravest  of  us  who  6 gains  pos- 
session of  the  enemy's  standard. 

2.  Those  who  have  too  much  money  derive  no  pleasure 
tfrom  the  use  of  it. 

1  Per.  2  See  p.  58,  n.  i.  3  Imperfect. 

4  Say  '  so  great.' 

5  The  word  '  he '  should  be  expressed  in  Latin  ('  is '). 

6  Say  <  shall  have  gained.'  7  Ex. 


ON  THE   GENITIVE.  103 

3.  1  Do  you  think,  soldiers,  that  your  commander  will  ever 
forget  you  ? 

4.  The  general  2  orders  ten  of  you  to  go  to  the  centre  of 
the  line  of  battle. 

5.  I  am  disgusted  with  you,  who  do  not  repent  of  so  great 
a  crime. 

6.  He  said  that  he  would  derive  some  pleasure  zfrom  this 
toil 

7.  It  is  of  the  greatest  importance  to  the  State  that  you 
should  remind  our  allies  of  the  wrongs  inflicted  on  us  by  the 
enemy. 

8.  Brutus,  who  condemned  his  own  sons  [as  guilty]  of 
treason,  was  a  man  of  wonderful  firmness. 

9.  I  think  that  he  did  this  from  fear  rather  than  from  love 
of  us. 

10.  He  said  that  he  pitied  those  who  were  not  ashamed  of 
their  crimes. 

11.  He  said  that  the  general  had  selected  a  few  of  you, 
whose  influence  he  valued  highly. 

12.  It  concerns  us  that  the  army  should  have  enough  corn. 


Exercise  10. 

1.  He  told  me  that  a  few  of  our  cohorts  could  inflict  very 
much  damage  on  the  enemy. 

2.  The  general  was  no  less  weary  of  the  blockade  than 
the  soldiers. 

3.  He  is  so  blind  with  love  of  us,  4  that  he  forgets  his  duty. 

1  To  mark  the  question,  put  '  ne '  after  the  verb,  written  as  one  word 
with  the  verb. 

2  Usejubeo.  3  Ex.  *  Ut  (with  subjunctive). 


104  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

4.  He  said  that  more  injury  would  be  brought   on   the 
State  by  the  death  of  you  alone  than  by  the  slaughter  of  a 
whole  legion. 

5.  The  general  will  place  a  few  of  you,  whose  valour  he 
esteems  most  highly,  in  the  front  of  the  line  of  march. 

6.  It  is  the  nature  of  fools  to  have  less  firmness  than  con- 
fidence. 

7.  Are  you  l  not  ashamed  of  those  crimes,  which  all  of  us 
remember  ? 

8.  It  is  of  importance  both  to  you  and  to  me  that  you 
should  have  the  money  of  which  you  are  in  want. 

9.  He  says  that  he  pities  those  who  had  been  placed  in 
the  rear  of  the  line  of  march. 

10.  I  did  not  think  that  you  had  been  so  forgetful  of  us. 

11.  The  general  says  that  he  had  too  little  cavalry. 

12.  The  enemy  hoped  that  they  would  kill  many  thousands 
of  us. 

1  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  2,  n.  2. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

ON  THE  INFINITIVE,  GERUNDS,  SUPINES,  AND  GERUNDIVE. 

SECTION  1.     On  the  infinitive. 
Sentences  to  be  learned  : 

1.  Dulce  et  decorum  est  pro  patria;  mori. 

//  is  a  sweet  and  glorious  thing  to  die  for  ones  country, 

or, 
Dying  for  ones  country  is  a  sweet  and  glorious  thing. 

2.  Mori  nemo  sapiens  miserum  dixerit. 

No  wise  man  will  call  (lit.  will  have  called}  it  miserable 
to  die, 

or, 
No  wise  man  will  call  dying  miserable. 

3.  Stoicus  esse  voluit. 

He  wished  to  be  a  Stoic. 

4.  Neu  sinas  Medos  equitare  inultos. 

And  may  si  thou   not  suffer   the   Medes  to  ride  un- 
punished. 

5.  Patriae  diceris  esse  pater. 

Thou  art  said  to  be  the  father  of  thy  country*. 

6.  Multi  sequi,  fugere,  occidi,  capi. 

Many    were  following,   flying,    being    slain,    being 

captured. 
To  find  the  subject  of  Sentence  i,  we  should  asjc  'What 


106  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

is  a  sweet  and  glorious  thing  ? '  The  answer  would  be, 
'  Dying  (or  '  to  die ')  for  one's  country/  The  word  '  dying ' 
is  here  a  verbal  noun,  signifying  the  act  of  dying,  and  is 
equivalent  to  the  infinitive  '  to  die/  In  Latin  the  infinitive  is 
used,  which  we  thus  see  is  a  kind  of  noun,  and  may  stand  as 
the  subject  noun  to  a  verb  (though  seldom  to  any  except  a 
copulative  verb). 

Again,  in  Sentence  2,  to  find  the  object  noun  we  should 
ask  f  What  will  no  wise  man  call  miserable  ? '  The  answer, 
as  before,  would  be  *  Dying '  or  '  To  die ' ;  in  Latin,  '  mori/ 
We  see,  then,  that  the  infinitive  may  also  stand  as  an  object 
noun  (generally  to  a  verb  of  thinking  or  calling). 

Notice  that  the  adjectives  qualifying  the  infinitives  used  as 
subject  and  object  nouns  are  in  the  neuter  gender  (dulce, 
decorum,  miserum). 

Notice  also  the  different  ways  of  translating  the  infinitive 
when  it  is  thus  used  as  subject  or  object  noun.  It  may  be 
rendered  either  by  a  verbal  noun,  as  '  dying/  or  by  the 
infinitive,  '  to  die/  If  the  infinitive  is  used  in  English,  the 
pronoun  '  it '  is  generally  inserted  in  the  regular  place  of  the 
subject  or  object  noun,  and  the  infinitive  is  added  after  the 
complement  to  explain  the  word  '  it '  (*  //  is  a  sweet  and 
glorious  thing  to  die,'  (  No  wise  man  will  call  it  miserable  to 
die.")  In  translating  such  sentences  into  Latin,  remember 
to  leave  out  the  word  '  it/ 

Be  very  careful  to  distinguish  between  the  English  verbal 
noun  and  the  present  participle,  which  is  the  same  in  form. 
Remember  that  a  participle  is  an  adjective,  and  must  qualify 
a  noun,  either  expressed  or  understood.  When  a  Latin 
participle  is  used  without  any  noun  to  agree  with,  '  man '  or 
'  men '  must  be  supplied.  It  may  be  variously  translated  into 
English.  Thus  '  morientem '  may  be  rendered  la  dying 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND  SUPINES.    107 


man!  '  one  dying!  '  one  who  is  dying!  '  one  who  dies!  or,  if 
the  verb  of  the  sentence  is  in  a  historic  tense,  '  one  who  was 
dying!  '  one  who  died!  So  also  'morientes'  may  be 
rendered  '  dying  men,'  '  the  dying!  '  those  dying,'  '  those  who 
are  dying,'  '  those  who  die',  '  those  who  were  dying',  '  those 
who  died'.  In  translating  such  expressions  into  Latin,  re- 
member that  the  word  '  one  '  or  '  those,'  when  joined  to  a 
participle,  must  be  left  out. 

In  Sentence  3,  the  infinitive  'esse,'  with  its  complement 
'  Stocius/  completes  the  meaning  of  the  verb  '  voluit/ 
Among  the  verbs  thus  used  with  an  infinitive  to  complete 
their  meaning  are  those  signifying  '  to  wish',  '  to  be  able',  '  to 
dare  '  (and  the  opposites  of  these),  '  to  be  accustomed!  '  to 
learn!  '  to  defer  mine,'  '  to  begin!  '  to  cease!  with  '  debeo/ 
^  I  ought!  and  some  others.  Many  of  these  may  also  be  used 
with  an  accusative  instead  of  the  infinitive  (most  commonly 
the  accusative  neuter  of  a  pronoun).  Thus  we  can  say 
'  Hoc  volo/  '/  wish  this  '  :  '  Quod  poterant,  id  audebant,' 
'  What  they  could,  that  they  dared.'  When  the  infinitive  is 
used,  it  is  really  a  kind  of  object  noun. 

In  Sentence  4,  the  words  'equitare  inultos'  are  added, 
like  a  second  object  noun,  to  complete  the  meaning  of  the 
verb  '  sinas/  which  has  already  an  object  noun,  '  Medos,'  in 
the  accusative.  Just  as  verbs  of  asking  and  teaching  take  two 
accusatives,  one  of  the  person  and  one  of  the  thing,  so  the 
verbs  '  doceo,'  '  /  teach,'  '  jubeo/  «  /  bid,'  '  veto,'  '  I  forbid! 
'sino'  and  'patior,'  '  /  allow',  'cogo,'  '  /  compel!  and  some 
others,  may  be  used  with  an  accusative  of  a  person,  and  an 
infinitive  of  the  thing  which  he  is  taught,  bidden,  forbidden, 
allowed,  or  compelled,  to  do. 

In  Sentence  5,  the  words  '  patriae  esse  pater  '  form  the 
complement  of  the  copulative  verb  '  diceris.'  So  also  an 


108  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

infinitive  may  stand  as  the  complement  to  ' videor,'  * / seem', 
'  putor/  ' / am  thought'  &c. 

Notice  that,  in  Sentences  3  and  5,  the  words  '  Stoicus ' 
and  '  pater '  are  in  the  nominative,  because,  in  each  of  these 
sentences,  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  the  same  with  the 
subject  of  the  finite  verb,  which  of  course  would  be  denoted 
by  a  nominative,  if  expressed.  On  the  other  hand,  in  Sentence 
4,  the  subject  noun  of  the  infinitive  'equitare'  is  the  ac- 
cusative '  Medos,'  and  therefore  the  complement  '  inultos '  is 
also  in  the  accusative. 

Although  the  infinitive  is,  as  we  have  seen,  a  noun,  it  may, 
like  any  other  part  of  the  verb,  be  qualified  by  an  adverb,  or 
by  an  adverbial  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  with  noun 
(as  in  Sentence  i,  '  pro  patria  mori '),  and  it  may  have  a  noun 
depending  on  it  in  any  case  that  would  be  used  with  the  finite 
verb.  In  the  same  way  a  participle,  though  an  adjective, 
may  have  an  accusative  (or  any  other  case  that  the  finite  verb 
would  govern)  depending  on  it. 

In  Sentence  6,  the  infinitives  'sequi,'  'fugere/  'occidi,' 
'  capi,'  are  equivalent  to  imperfects  indicative,  and  must  be 
translated  as  such.  This  use  of  the  infinitive  is  called  the 
historic  infinitive,  and  is  chiefly  found  in  lively  descriptions 
of  scenes.  Several  such  infinitives  are  often  found  together. 
Notice  that  the  subject  noun  is  in  the  nominative,  not  the 
accusative.  We  may  sometimes  translate  a  historic  infinitive 
'  began  to  — / 

The  use  of  the  accusative  with  infinitive  depending  on 
a  verb  of  thinking  or  saying  was  explained  in  Chap,  ii,  and 
has  been  illustrated  in  all  the  succeeding  exercises.  In  this 
construction  the  whole  infinitive  clause  takes  the  place  of  an 
object  noun. 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND   SUPINES.    109 

Exercise  1. 

1.  Nothing  seems  to   me   more  desirable  than  living  at 
home  with  honour. 

2.  Do  you  lnot  think  it  most  base  to  insult  a  dying  man  ? 

3.  We   answered  the   ambassadors,  that  the  pardon,  for 
which  we  were  asked,  would  be  granted  to  z  those  who  yielded. 

4.  These   are   the   words   of  one   rejoicing  rather   than 
grieving. 

5.  What  fault  can  be  more  disgraceful  than  lying? 

6.  Then  the  multitude  3  began  to  cry  out  and  threaten ;  *and, 
5  owing  to  the  shouts  of  those  demanding  battle,  the  general's 
voice  could  4  not  be  heard. 

7.  I  will  bid  him  be  *  more  mindful  of  us ;  for  it  is  a  mark 
of  an  ungrateful  man  to  forget  his  friends. 

8.  He  7  said  that  he  *  knew  7  nothing  more  pleasant  than 
living  in  the  country,  and  reading  the  books  of  the  philoso- 
phers, Plato  and  Aristotle. 

9.  He  said  that  he  had  been  able  to  hear  both  the  groans 
of  the  dying  and  the  shouts  of  those  pursuing. 

10.  The  fight,  which  our  men  fought  that  day,  is  said  to 
have  been  the  most  glorious  of  all  fights. 

Exercise  2. 
i.  9  Complaining  ^/"fortune  is  not  a  remedy  ™for  pain. 

See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  2,  n.  2.  2  Use  a  participle. 

Use  the  historic  infinitive.  *  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  4,  n.  i. 

Prae.  6  The  comparative  of '  memor  '  is  '  magis  memor.' 

See  Chap,  v,  Ex.  14,  n.  i. 

Novi  (perf.  of  nosco),  I  have  become  acquainted  with  =  I  know. 
Quer-or,  -i,  questus  sum,  I  complain  of,  trans. 
10  See  Chap,  vi,  Sect.  4. 


110  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

2.  Caesar   1  gave   orders  to   his   men,  ^not  to  pursue  the 
flying. 

3.  The  State    seems  to  have  been  saved  by  your  single 
vote. 

4.  It  is  unworthy  of  you,  a  Roman  soldier,  to  3  depart  from 
your  post. 

5.  He  said  that  he  would  hear  the  words  of  those  4  com- 
plaining of  injuries. 

6.  Writing  with  care  is  useful  for  those,  who  are  being 
taught  the  Latin  language. 

7.  The  city  had  5 now  been  besieged  for  many  months; 
6  and  scarcity  of  provisions  was  troubling  the  besieging  6  no 
less  than  the  besieged. 

8.  It  is  much  easier  to  all  of  you  to  confess  your  faults 
than  to  amend  your  7  ways. 

9.  Betraying  a  friend  for  money  is  more  disgraceful  than 
being  taken  by  the  enemy. 

10.  We  will  not  suffer  you  to  be  a  private  man,  while  your 
son  is  consul. 


SECTION  2.     On  the  gerunds  and  supines. 
Sentences  to  be  learned : 

1.  Ad  bene  vivendum  breve  tempus  satis  est. 
For  living  well  a  short  time  is  sufficient. 

2.  Dat  operam  legendo. 

He  pays  attention  to  reading. 


1  Impero,  I  give  orders.  2  See  p.  42,  n.  i. 

3  De-ced-o,  -ere,  -cess-i,  -um.  *  See  p.  109,  n.  9.          5  Jam. 

6  Begin  the  sentence  with  ' and  not  less ; '  and  see  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  4,  n.  i. 

7  Mores,  pi.  of  mos. 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND   SUPINES.    Ill 

3.  Multae  civitates  non  sunt  solvendo. 

Many  states  are  not  capable  of  paying  (lit.  are  not  for 
paying). 

4.  Fugiendo  vinciraus. 
We  conquer  by  flying. 

5.  De  pugnando  deliberant. 
They  deliberate  about  fighting . 

6.  Ars  scribendi  discitur. 

The  art  of  writing  is  learned. 

7.  Cupidus  sum  satisfaciendi  reipublicae. 
I  am  desirous  of  satisfying  the  state. 

8.  Lusum  it  Maecenas,  dormitum  ego. 
Maecenas  goes  to  play,  I  to  sleep. 

9.  Foedum  dictu  est. 
//  is  horrible  to  tell. 

In  the  first  seven  of  these  sentences  the  words  'living,' 
'  reading/  '  paying/  '  flying/  '  fighting/  '  writing/  *  satisfying/ 
are  all  verbal  nouns.  We  saw  in  the  last  Section  that  for 
a  verbal  noun  standing  as  subject  or  object  noun  the  infinitive 
could  be  used  in  Latin.  For  the  accusative  depending  on  a 
preposition,  and  for  the  dative,  ablative,  and  genitive,  the 
gerunds *  are  used,  as  we  see  in  these  sentences. 

The  accusative  gerund  is  most  commonly  used  with  the 
preposition  'ad/  as  in  Sent,  i,  where  'ad  vivendum'  = 
lfor  living  I  i.e.  'for  the  purpose  of  living.'  This  might  also 
be  translated  '  to  live,  and  is  one  way  of  expressing  a  purpose 
in  Latin.  [N.B.  When  'to  — '  expresses  a  purpose,  it  must 
never  be  translated  by  the  infinitive  in  Latin,  unless  it 
depends  on  a  verb  expressing  purpose,  as  '  He  determined 

1  Or  the  gerundive,  as  will  be  explained  in  the  next  Section. 


112  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

to  go/]  The  accusative  gerund  is  also  used  with  *  inter/  '  in 
the  midst  of  I  '  in  the  act  of'  and  occasionally  with  other 
prepositions. 

The  dative  gerund  is  used 

(1)  as  a  dative  of  the  remoter  object,  depending, 

(a)  as  in  Sentence  2,  on  such  a  verb  as  *  do/  '  / 
give!  '  praesum/  *  I  preside  over,'  &c.,  or 

(£)  on  an  adjective  expressing  fitness,  such  as 
'aptus/  'suited]  'utilis/  'useful'  (though 
with  these  '  ad '  with  the  accusative  gerund 
is  more  common) : 

(2)  as  a  dative  of  the  purpose  or  result, 

(a)  depending  on  a  verb  of  appointing  or  choosing 
('  to  appoint  a  day  for  starting '), 

(3)  forming  the  complement  to  a  copulative  verb, 
as  in   Sentence  3,  where  '  solvendo '  is   best 
translated  '  capable  of  paying' 
The  ablative  gerund  is  used 

(1)  as  an  ablative  of  means,  as  in  Sentence  4  : 

(2)  as  an  ablative  of  cause  ('  weary  with  fighting'), 

(3)  depending  on  a  preposition,  as  in  Sentence  5.     The 

prepositions  with  which  it  is  used  are  'in/  'ex' 
and  <ab'  (from'),  and  'de'  ('about'). 
The  genitive  gerund  is  used 

(1)  depending  on  a  noun,  as  in  Sentence  6,  as  a  genitive 

of  that  of  which  something  consists  (see  Chap,  vi, 
Sect.  3,  last  paragraph) : 

(2)  as  an  objective  genitive,  depending  on  a  noun  or 

adjective,  as   in  Sentence  7,  where  '  cupidus  sum 
satisfaciendi  '='  cupio  satisfacere.' 
Remember  that  '  of  writing/  '  for  writing/  '  by  writing/  &c., 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND   SUPINES.    113 

can  never  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  participles.  '  Scribentis,' 
in  accordance  with  what  was  said  in  the  last  Section,  means, 
not  c  of  writing/  but  '  of  one  who  is  writing.' 

The  supines,  as  well  as  the  gerunds,  are  really  cases  of 
a  verbal  noun,  though  one  of  a  different  form  from  the 
gerunds.  The  supine  in  -um  is  the  accusative,  the  supine 
in  -u  the  ablative,  of  a  noun  of  the  fourth  declension.  As 
a  rule,  this  form  of  verbal  noun  is  only  used  in  these  two 
cases,  though  there  are  some  verbal  nouns  of  the  fourth 
declension  which  are  used  in  other  cases  also,  just  like  any 
ordinary  noun.  Such  are  *  sensus/  lfeelingl  from  '  sentio/ 
'  tactus/  '  touchl  from  '  tango/  '  cursus/  '  running]  from 
'  curro/  &c. 

The  supine  in  -um  is  used,  as  we  see  in  Sentence  8,  with 
a  verb  of  motion,  to  express  the  purpose  for  which  one  goes. 
This  is  like  the  use  of  the  accusative  of  the  name  of  a  town 
to  which  one  goes.  Like  the  accusative  gerund  with  '  ad/ 
the  supine  in  -um  expresses  a  purpose,  but  it  can  only  be 
used  with  a  verb  of  motion,  whereas  the  accusative  gerund 
with  '  ad '  may  be  used  with  other  verbs  as  well.  Beware 
of  translating  'to  — '  after  a  verb  of  motion  by  the  in- 
finitive. 

We  can  now  understand  how  the  supine  in  -um  with  the 
present  infinitive  passive  of  '  eo '  came  to  be  used  as  the 
future  infinitive  passive  of  a  transitive  verb.  For,  as  any 
intransitive  verb  can  be  used  impersonally  in  the  passive, 
we  can  say  'itur/  meaning  '//  t's  gone  (by  somebody)*  i.e. 
'  Somebody  is  going'  Prefixing  to  this  a  supine  in  -um,  e.g. 
'  datum/  we  get  '  datum  itur '  =  '  Somebody  is  going  to  give! 
Now  the  supine  in  -um,  like  an  infinitive,  may  have  an 
object  noun  in  the  accusative,  and  so  '  datum  itur  uxorem ' 
=.'  Somebody  is  going  to  give  a  wife?  Turning  this  into  an 

i 


1 1 4  INTR  OD  UCTION  TO   LA  TIN  S  YNTAX. 

infinitive  clause  depending  on  a  verb  of  thinking  or  saying, 

we  get  -j  \  datum  iri  uxorem'  =  '  He  {      .        \  that 

I  '  Putat  J  I  flunk*  ) 

somebody   is  going  to  give  a   wife'  —  1  He   <       .  .     \  that  a 

wife  will  be  given! 

In  Sentence  9,  '  foedum  dictu '  means  literally  '  horrible  in 
the  telling!  '  Dictu/  the  so  called  supine  in  -u,  is  then  an 
ablative  of  respect,  qualifying  the  adjective  '  foedum.'  The 
expression  may  be  translated  ' horrible  to  telV  or  ' horrible' 
to  be  told!  Remember,  then,  that  '  to  — /  when  it  qualifies 
an  adjective,  must  not  be  translated  by  the  infinitive,  but  by 
the  supine  in  -u. 

In  Sentence  7,  '  reipublicae '  is  a  dative  depending  on  the 
gerund  '  satisfaciendi/  This  shows  that  the  gerunds,  like 
the  infinitive,  although  nouns,  differ  from  other  nouns  in 
taking  the  same  cases  as  the  verbs  from  which  they  are 
formed.  (They  may  also,  like  verbs,  be  qualified  by  adverbs, 
as  we  see  from  Sentence  i.)  The  same  is  true,  as  we  have 
already  seen,  of  the  supine  in  -um.  The  supine  in  -u,  from 
the  nature  of  its  use,  can  never  have  another  noun  depending 
on  it. 

Exercise  3. 

1.  *//  is  certain  that  the  Roman  people  was  by  nature 
suited  for  commanding  other  nations. 

2.  I  am  ashamed  of  you,  who  are  more  desirous  of  escap- 
ing than  of  conquering  the  enemy. 

3.  Having  dismissed  the  ambassadors,  he   said  that   he 

1  Constat. 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND   SUPINES. 

would  within  the  l  next  two  hours  2  appoint  a  day  for  setting 
out  against  the  enemy. 

4.  He   said  that  he  had  become  the  strongest  of  us  by 
using  his  limbs. 

5.  On  the  following  day  ambassadors,  sent  by  the  con- 
quered, came  to  ask  the  conquerors  for  pardon. 

6.  The  3  line  of  the  flying  was  pitiable  to  see,  even  to  those 
pursuing. 

7.  In  the  midst  of  drinking  he  fell,  crying  out  that  he  was 
dying. 

8.  So  great  was  the  desire  of  avenging  these  wrongs, 4  that 
neither  B  those  who  resisted  nor  *  those  who  fled  were  spared. 

9.  He   said   that  he   placed   his  only  hope  of  safety  in 
resisting  the  enemy. 

10.  You  teach  others  the  art  of  painting;   but  I  do  not 
think  that  you  yourself  have  paid  attention  to  writing. 


Exercise  4. 

1.  The  slaughter  was   horrible  to  see;   men  and  horses 
6  were   everywhere  flying,   being   captured,  wounded,    [and] 
slain. 

2.  For  commanding  well  it  is  useful  to  have  ' 'first  obeyed 
others. 

3.  Nothing  shall  deter  us  *from  succouring  our  allies. 

4.  Ambassadors   were   sent  from    Rome  to   Clusium,  to 


.  *  Proxim-us,  -a,  -um.          2  Dic-o,  -ere,  dixi,  die-turn.          3  Agmen. 

*  Ut,  with  subjunctive.     For  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive,  see  Chap,  ii, 
Sect. 

5  Use  participles.  6  Use  the  historic  infinitive. 

7  Prius,  neuter  of  prior,  used  as  adverb.  8  Ab. 

I  2 


1 1 6  INTR  OD  UCTION  TO  LA  TIN  S  YNTAX. 

1  complain  of  the  injuries  inflicted  on  the  allies  of  the  Roman 
people. 

5.  To  one  fighting  for  his  country  nothing  seems  trouble- 
some to  do. 

6.  T.  Manlius  2  had  the  surname  of  Capitolinus,  because 
he  had  saved  the  Capitol  by  throwing  down  the  Gauls  3  who 
ivere  climbing  up. 

7.  He  said  that  the  soldiers  were  being  4  carried  away  by 
desire  of  gaining  possession  of  the  enemy's  camp. 

8.  He  said  that  we  should  be  surprised  by  our  enemies 
the  Volscians  in  the  midst  of  disputing. 

9.  The   consul   will   send  a  few  of  us   to  lay  waste  the 
enemy's  lands. 

10.  Tired  with  pursuing  rather  than  fighting,  they  returned 
by  the  shortest  way  into  the  camp. 


SECTION  3.     On  the  gerundive  attraction. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : — 

1.  Brutus  in  liberanda  patria  est  interfectus. 
Brutus  was  slain  in  freeing  his  country. 

2.  Hi  septemviri  fuerunt  agris  dividendis. 

These  were  tJie  seven  commissioners  for  dividing  lands. 
In  these  two  sentences  we  have  'instances  of  the  construc- 
tion called  gerundive  attraction.  '  In  liberanda  patria '  and 
'  dividendis  agris '  are  translated  as  if  '  liberanda '  and  '  divi- 
dendis '  were  gerunds,  and  '  patria '  and  '  agris '  accusatives 
dependent  on  them.  Notice  that  the  object  noun,  instead  of 
being  in  the  accusative,  is  attracted,  or  drawn,  into  the  case 
in  which  the  gerund  would  have  been,  while  the  gerundive, 

1  See  p.  109,  n.  9.  2  Use  the  verb  '  sum.' 

3  Use  a  participle.  *  Effer-o,  -re,  extuli,  elatum. 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND   SUPINES.    117 

M'hich  is  used  instead  of  the  gerund,  is  attracted  to  the  gender 
and  number  of  the  object  noun. 

The  dative  gerund  is  not  used  with  an  accusative  depend- 
ing on  it,  nor  can  a  gerund  depending  on  a  preposition  be 
used  with  an  accusative:  instead  of  these  the  gerundive 
attraction  must  be  used.  Thus  you  cannot  translate  'far 
dividing  lands '  by  '  agros  dividendo/  nor  '  in  freeing  his 
country'  by  'in  liberando  patriam/  but  must  say  'agris 
dividendis'  and  'in  liberanda  patria/  On  the  other  hand 
you  can  say  either  '  agros  dividendo '  or  '  agris  dividendis ' 
for  '  by  dividing  lands ' ;  and  either  '  liberandi  patriam '  or 
'  liberandae  patriae '  for  '  of  freeing  his  country' 

The  use  of  the  gerundive  attraction  is  common  in  the  titles 
of  officers,  expressing  the  purpose  for  which  they  were  ap- 
pointed, as  in  Sentence  2,  '  septemviri  agris  dividendis/  Here 
the  dative  seems  to  depend  on  a  noun ;  but  a  participle  such 
as  '  appointed '  may  be  easily  supplied,  on  which  the  dative 
may  be  said  to  depend. 

Exercise  5. 

1.  From   recalling   the  army  he    turned  *  to   exhort    the 
soldiers. 

2.  It  is  of  the  greatest  importance  to  the  State  that  the 
consul  should  give  his  attention  to  holding  the  levy. 

3.  He  says  that  too  much  time  was  spent  in  getting  ready 
arms. 

4.  [There]  was  no  hope  that  the  besieged  would  be  saved 
except  by  surrendering  the  city. 

5.  He  said  that  the  enemy  had  deliberated  for  many  hours 
about  killing  the  hostages,  who  were  being  kept  at  Luceria. 

1  Ad. 


1 1 8  INTR OD  UC TION  TO  LA  TIN  S  YNTAX. 

6.  Caius  and  I  have  been  "^appointed  2 commissioners  for 
dedicating  the  temple. 

7.  3  Complaining  y  fortune  is  useless  for  lessening  [one's] 
ills. 

8.  Some  write  that  the  consul  returned  to  Rome  for  the 
sake  of  holding  the  levy. 

9.  Marcus,  a  man  of  the  greatest  valour,  had  been  sent  by 
the  Appian  road  to  reconnoitre  the  4  country. 

10.  He  said  that  that,  however  easy  to  say,  could  scarcely 
be  accomplished  without  great  labour. 

Exercise  6. 

1.  The  Romans  thought  that  by  surrendering  the  consuls 
they  had  been  freed  from  their  obligation. 

2.  We  place  our  only  hope  of  victory  in  saving  the  citadel. 

3.  It  concerns  us,  citizens,  that  our  generals  should  have 
enough  forces  for  storming  the  city. 

4.  Ambassadors  had  been  sent  from  Rome  to  Alba  a  few 
days  before  to  5  demand  satisfaction. 

5.  He  was  6  seized  with   a   desire  of  seeing   the  temple, 
which  was  not  many  paces  distant. 

6.  He  said  that  this  was  a  good  deal  easier  to  say  than 
to  do. 

7.  7  When  he  was  encouraging  the  soldiers  8  to  attack  the 
enemy's  camp,  he  was  struck  by  an  arrow  in  the  midst  of 
speaking. 


1  Cre-o,  -are.  2  Duumvir-i,  -orum,  lit.  two  men. 

s  See  p.  109,  n.  9.  *  Loca,  plural  of  locus. 

5  Res  repet-o,  -ere,  -ivi,  -itum,  I  demand  satisfaction. 

6  Cap-io,  -ere,  cepi,  cap-turn.         7  See  Chap,  iii,  Ex.  5,  n.  2.        8  Ad. 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,   GERUNDS,  AND  SUPINES.    119 

8.  It  is  the  part  of  a  coward  to  desert  the  dying  in  hope 
of  escaping  death. 

9.  The  only  hope  of  saving  the  city  l  lies  in  saving  the 
king. 

10.  These  men  have  come  to  the  consul  to  2  complain  of 
the  wrongs  inflicted  on  them  by  you,  an  ambassador  of  the 
Roman  people. 


SECTION  4. — On  the  impersonal  use  of  the  gerundive. 

Sentences  to  be  learned  : — 
i.  Eundum  est. 

( must      \ 

has  to 

One  4  V  go  (lit.  */  is  to  be  gone}, 

ought  to  ' 


\  should 

2.  Eundum  fuit. 

had  to  go 


One   \ 


ought  to  have  gone  h   (lit.  it  was  to  be  gone). 


should  have  gone    } 

3.  Eundum  erit  mihi. 

/  shall  have  to  go  (lit.  it  will  be  to  be  gone  by  me]. 

4.  Suo  cuique  judicio  est  utendum. 

(must 

has  to 

Each  \         7J  .    \  use  his  own  judgment, 
ought  to  ' 

should 


1  Perf.  pass,  of  pon-o,  -ere,  posui,  positum.  a  See  p.  109,  n.  9. 


120  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

5.  Civibus  est  a  vobis  consulendum. 
must 

You  \  ,    Y  consult  for  the  citizens. 

\  ought  to  | 

should 

As  any  intransitive  verb  can  be  used  impersonally  in  the 
passive,  the  neuter  of  the  gerundive  of  an  intransitive  verb, 
with  '  est,'  '  fuit/  or  '  erit/  may  be  so  used,  as  in  these  sen- 
tences, to  express  that  something  is,  was,  or  will  be,  to  be 
done.  Notice  particularly  the  different  ways  in  which  these 
expressions  may  be  rendered  in  English. 

If  we  want  to  express  the  person  by  whom  something  is  to 
be  done,  the  dative  should  generally  be  used,  as  in  Sentences 
3  and  4  ('  mihi '  and  '  cuique ') ;  see  Chap,  iv,  Sect.  3.  In 
English,  as  we  turn  the  passive  into  an  active  verb,  this 
dative  must  be  turned  into  the  subject  noun.  Thus,  in 
Sentence  4,  '  cuique  est  utendum  '  =  '  each  must  use!  In 
this  sentence,  besides  the  dative  'cuique,'  used  with  the 
gerundive  to  express  the  agent,  we  have  an  ablative  '  suo 
judicio '  depending  on  the  verb  '  utor  '  (see  Chap,  v,  Sect.  3). 
Thus  we  see  that  the  gerundive  of  an  intransitive  verb  with 
'est/  'fuit,1  or  'erit/  used  impersonally,  may  have  a  noun 
depending  on  it  in  the  same  case  (dative,  ablative,  or  geni- 
tive) that  the  verb  usually  takes. 

Thus  with  the  gerundive  of  a  verb  which  takes  the  dative, 
we  might  have  two  datives,  one  completing  the  meaning  of 
the  verb,  the  other  expressing  the  agent ;  but,  as  this  might 
make  the  meaning  doubtful,  it  is  more  usual  in  such  cases  to 
express  the  agent  by  the  ablative  with  'a'  or  cab/  as  in 
Sentence  5,  where '  civibus '  is  the  dative  of  the  persons  whose 
advantage  has  to  be  consulted  for,  while  the  agent  is 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND   SUPINES.    12T 

expressed  by '  a  vobis '  instead  of  the  dative.  If  the  dative 
'  vobis  '  had  been  used,  we  could  not  have  been  sure  whether 
the  meaning  was  '  You  must  consult  for  the  citizens,'  or 
1  The  citizens  must  consult  for  you.' 

We  saw  in  Chap,  iv,  Sect.  2,  that  with  many  verbs  the 
dative  must  be  translated  in  English  without  any  preposition, 
just  as  if  it  were  an  accusative.  When  the  gerundive  of  one 
of  these  verbs  is  used  with  '  est/  we  may  either  turn  it 
actively  in  English,  as  in  the  sentences  at  the  beginning  of 
this  Section,  or  we  may  use  the  passive,  in  which  case  the 
dative  of  remoter  object  must  be  turned  into  the  subject  noun. 
Thus  '  Parendum  est  a  te  imperatori '  may  be  translated 
either  '  You  must  obey  the  commander  I  or  '  The  commander 
must  be  obeyed  by  you' 

Exercise  7. 

1.  We  had  to  be  silent  about  our  own  miseries. 

2.  We  have  to  fly  from  home  into  the  country. 

3.  We  are  entirely  without  corn,  and  shall  soon  have  to 
feed  on  skins. 

4.  He   said   that  the    general's    command    ought    to   be 
obeyed  by  the  soldiers. 

5.  You  should  not  have  believed  those  who  told  you  this. 

6.  It  was  announced  to  the  captives,  that  [they]  must  all 
die  on  the  following  day. 

7.  In  this  man's  consulship  the  Romans  had  to  fight  with 
many  enemies  at  once. 

8.  You,  who  used  to  be  considered  a  man  of  prudence, 
ought  to  have  performed  this  duty. 

9.  I,  who  have  been  taken  by  the  enemy,  shall  have  to  die 
in  a  foreign  land  within  a  few  days. 


122  INTRODUCTION  TO   LATIN  SYNTAX. 

10.  We  should  remember  our  allies  the  Romans  rather 
than  our  enemies  the  Carthaginians. 


Exercise  8. 

1.  In  so  great  a  danger  we  must  not  deliberate,  but  dare 
and  l  do. 

2.  The  soldiers  knew  that  their  commander  had   to  be 
obeyed. 

3.  The  general,  standing  *  on  the  top  of  a  mound,  had  to 
shout  with  a  loud  voice,  that  he  might  be  heard  to  the  3  end  of 
the  camp. 

4.  The  general  should  use  rather  than  enjoy  so  great  a 
victory. 

5.  You  ought  to  have  pitied  *  such  great  sorrow. 

6.  We  shall  have  to  5  exercise  'the  greatest  care  in  choosing 
a  commander. 

7.  That  year  all  of  us  had  to  6  remove  from  the  country 
into  the  city. 

8.  He  did  not  think  that  he  ought  to  fight  with  so  great  a 
number  of  the  enemy. 

9.  He  answered  that  a  Roman  soldier  must  never  forget 
his  duty. 

10.  You  should  not  have  hesitated  about  succouring  7  those 
who  were  in  difficulty. 

1  Ag-o,  -ere,  egi,  actum.  3  In. 

3  Use  an  adjective.     See  Chap,  vi,  Sect.  3.  4  Tant-us,  -a,  -um. 

5  Ut-or,  -i,  usus  sum.  6  See  Chap,  v,  Ex.  12,  n.  2. 

7  Use  a  participle.     Labor-o,  -are,  I  am  in  difficulty. 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND  SUPINES.   123 

SECTION  5. — On  the  attributive  use  of  the  gerundive. 
Sentences  to  be  learned  : — 

1.  Legendae  sunt  pueris  Aesopi  fabulae. 

are  to 
must 

JEsop's  fables  -j  have  to    \  be  read  by  boys  : 
ought  to 
should 
or, 

/  must      \ 

have  to 

B°^S  ]  oughtto 
\should    ] 

2.  Non  tangenda  rates  transiliunt  vada. 

Ships  fly  over  the  seas  that  ought  not  to  be  meddled  with. 

3.  Diviti  aurum  servandum  dedit. 

He  gave  the  gold  to  a  rich  man  to  keep. 

4.  Traditi  sunt  fetialibus  Caudium  ducendi. 

They   were   handed  over   to   the  fetials   to  be  led  to 

Caudium. 

In  Sentence  i,  'legendae,'  the  gerundive  of  a  transitive 
verb,  is  used  with  « sunt/  in  the  same  way  as  we  saw  in  the 
last  Section  that  the  gerundive  of  an  intransitive  verb  could 
be  used  with  '  est/  with  this  difference,  that,  instead  of  being 
used  impersonally,  the  verb  has  a  subject  noun  to  agree  with, 
which  the  gerundive  qualifies.  The  gerundive  is  here  said  to 
be  used  attributively,  because  it  expresses  an  attribute,  or 
quality  of  the  thing  denoted  by  the  noun.  Notice  the  differ- 
ent ways  in  which  the  expression  can  be  rendered  in  English. 
It  is  often  best  to  turn  the  verb  actively,  in  which  case  the 
agent,  denoted  by  the  dative  in  Latin,  becomes  the  subject  of 


124  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX. 

the  English  sentence,  while  the  subject  of  the  Latin  sentence 
becomes  the  object.     Of  course  we  may  also  say — 

Legendae  fuerunt  pueris  Aesopi  fabulae, 
which  may  be  translated — 

/  had  to  be 


JE sop' s  fables   \  ought  to  have  been 


read  by  the  boys  ; 


\  should  have  been 
or, 

C  had  to  read  \ 

The  boys  -\  ought  to  have  read  [  JZsop's  fables  : 

1  should  have  read    } 
and 

Legendae  erunt  pueris  Aesopi  fabulae, 
which  may  be  translated — 

jEsop's  fables  will  have  to  be  read  by  the  boys, 
or, 

The  boys  will  have  to  read  J2 sop's  fables. 

The  gerundive  of  a  transitive  verb  may  also  be  used,  as  in 
Sentence  2,  without  '  est '  or  '  sunt/  qualifying  a  noun  like  any 
other  adjective.  When  this  is  the  case,  it  is  often  best  to 
render  it  in  English  by  a  relative  clause,  as  in  this  Sentence. 
Sometimes,  as  in  Sentences  3  and  4,  the  gerundive  of  a 
transitive  verb  is  used  qualifying  the  object  or  subject  noun, 
and  completing  the  meaning  of  another  transitive  verb,  active 
or  passive,  in  such  a  way  as  to  be  equivalent  to  a  clause 
expressing  a  purpose.  Thus,  in  Sentence  3,  the  meaning  of 
'  servandum '  (lit.  'to  be  kept,'}  which  forms  the  complement 
of  '  dedit/  might  otherwise  have  been  expressed  by  the  words 
'  quod  servaret/  And  in  Sentence  4,  instead  of  '  ducendi/ 
which  forms  the  complement  of  '  traditi  sunt/  we  might  have 
had  '  ut  ducerentur/  The  gerundive  used  in  this  way  may 
be  rendered  in  English  by  the  preposition  'to,'  with  either 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND   SUPINES.    125 

the  infinitive  active,  as  in  Sentence  3,  or  the  infinitive  passive, 
as  in  Sentence  4. 

Exercise  9. 

1.  You  must  not  endure  so  great  a  disgrace. 

2.  An  opportunity  of  fighting  with  the  enemy  has  to  be 
given  to  the  soldiers. 

3.  Those,  who  1  ivere  born  of  free  parents,  were  sent  into 
the  camp  to  be  2  kept  under  guard. 

4.  They  said  that  you  and  Caius,  who  had  not  gone  to  the 
general's  aid,  ought  rightly  to  be  deprived  of  your  arms. 

5.  You  should  not  have   spent  the  rest  of  the  time  in 
playing.    , 

6.  These  things,  and  worse  than  these,  will  have  to  be 
endured  by  me  at  Thebes. 

7.  We  have  to  obey  those  who  have  given  us  the  hostages 
to  keep. 

8.  The  opportunity  of  indulging  their  anger  should  not 
have  been  given  to  the  soldiers. 

9.  We  shall  have  to  mourn  many  who  have  been  slain  in 
freeing  their  country. 

10.  Two  of  you  must  be  sent  home  to  announce  that  tfce 
allies  are  by  no  means  ready  for  fighting. 

1 1 .  You  are  thought  by  3  most  men  to  be  the  writer  of  a 
book  4  which  ought  to  be  read  by  all. 

12.  He  5said  that  these  insults,  so  disgraceful  to  tell,  were 
5  not  to  be  endured  by  Roman  citizens. 

1  See  Chap,  v,  Ex.  12,  n.  6. 

2  Custod-io,  -Ire,  I  keep  under  guard.  3  Pler-ique,  -aeque,  -aque. 

4  Compare  the  second  of  the  Sentences  to  be  learned  at  the  beginning 
of  this  Section. 

5  See  Chap,  ii,  Ex.  i,  n.  i. 


126  INTR OD  UCTION  TO  LA  TIN  S  YNTAX. 

Exercise  10. 

1.  A  river  three  hundred  feet  broad  had  to  be  crossed  by 
the  arm}7. 

2.  We  had  to  endure  the  injuries  inflicted  on  us  by  the 
conquerors. 

3.  l  One  of  these  apples  is  sweeter  to  taste,  the  other  softer 
to  touch. 

4.  We  have  to  guard  the  women  and  2  children,  who  have 
been  entrusted  to  our  care. 

5.  You  should   appoint  a  time  for  setting  out  from  the 
city. 

6.  You  ought   not  to  have  neglected  the  advice  of  your 
father  for  so  many  years. 

7.  We  shall  have  to  pursue  the  flying  for  many  miles. 

8.  Do  you  3  not  feel  that  this  is  a  very  great  disgrace,  4  and 
[one]  that  ought  never  to  be  endured  by  a  man  of  courage  ? 

9.  He  promised  that  those,  whose  houses  and  goods  had 
been  destroyed  in  keeping  off  the  enemy,  should  receive  lands 
to  cultivate. 

10.  Never,  while  I  am  tribune,  shall  a  Roman  citizen  be 
handed  over  to  the  lictors  to  be  beaten. 

11.  He  said  that  you  and  I,  who  had  given  up  our  arms, 
ought  to  be  shut  out  of  the  city. 

12.  He  said  that  he  had  been  sent  from  Rome  to  5  inquire 
into  the  disposition  of  the  allies. 

1  See  p.  28,  n.  2.  2  Pueri. 

3  See  Chap,  i,  Ex.  2,  n.  2. 

*  Compare  the  second  of  the  Sentences  to  be  learned  at  the  beginning 
of  this  Section.  For  'and — never/  say  'and  not  ever,'  and  see  Chap,  ii, 
Ex.  4,  n.  i. 

5  Per-spic-io,  -ere,  -spexi,  -spectum,  I  inquire  into,  trans. 


ON  THE  INFINITIVE,    GERUNDS,   AND  SUPINES.    127 

Exercise  11. 

1.  The  soldiers  felt  that  they  had  to  fight  with  an  im- 
placable enemy. 

2.  The  consul,  l  thinking  that  he  ought  to  encourage  the 
soldiers,  2  ordered  the  legions  to  assemble  3  in  arms. 

3.  The  Samnites  sent   the   hostages   of  the  Romans  to 
Luceria  to  be  4  kept  under  guard. 

4.  He  said  that  he  would  5  give  up  the  bodies  of  the  slain 
to  their  friends  to  bury. 

5.  The  Greeks  thought  it  a  noble   deed   to  free  [one's] 
country  by  killing  a  tyrant. 

6.  The  consuls  should  not  have  spent  the  whole  of  that 
day  in  deliberating. 

7.  The    consul,    having   set   out  to  *  go  through  Apulia, 
conquered  some   peoples,  received  others   into  alliance  on 
fair  terms. 

8.  The  slaughter,  horrible   to  '  hear  of,  was  even  more 
horrible  to  see. 

9.  We  have  8  no  need  of  the  help  of  those,  who  are  not 
9  capable  of  bearing  arms. 

10.  He  said  that  you  had10^/  an  example  which  ought  to 
be  imitated  by  all  good  men. 

11.  The  tribunes  of  the  plebs  were  handed  over  to  the 
fetials  with  the  rest  to  be  led  to  Caudium. 

12.  Resisting  [one's]  passions  is  more  difficult  than  taking 
a  city. 

Use  a  deponent  verb,  and  say  '  having  thought.' 
Use  jubeo.  3  Say  '  armed.'  *  See  Ex.  9,  n.  2. 

Tra-do,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum.         6  Peragr-o,  -are,  I  go  through,  trans. 
Audio,  I  hear  of,  trans.  8  Non. 

Compare  the -third  of  the  Sentences  to  be  learned  at  the  beginning 
of  Sect.  2. 

10  Ed-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum. 


VOCABULARIES. 


BEFORE  looking  for  a  word  in  these  Vocabularies,  think  what  part  of 
speech  it  is.  A  separate  Vocabulary  is  given  for  each  part  of  speech. 
Pronouns  which  stand  for  nouns  (as  the  personal  pronouns,  the  relative 
pronoun,  and  the  interrogative  'who?')  will  be  found  among  nouns, 
while  the  possessive,  demonstrative,  and  other  so-called  pronouns  which 
qualify  nouns  are  given  among  adjectives. 


1.    NOUNS. 

Note. — All  proper  names  used  in  the  exercises  will  be  found  in  this 
Vocabulary  except  those  which,  ending  in  -a  or  -us,  are  the  same  in  Latin 
as  in  English,  and  are  declined  regularly  according  to  the  first  or  second 
declension. 

The  genitive  of  each  noun  is  given,  to  show  how  the  noun  is  declined, 
but  not  the  gender,  as  this  can  always  be  found  by  applying  the  rules 
for  genders  of  nouus. 


Ability,  ingerri-um,  -i. 
Abode,  domicili-um,  -i. 
Account,  see   Chap,   vi,   Sec.   i. 

On  account  of,  see  Vocabulary 

of  Prepositions. 
Acnaean,  Achae-us,  -i. 
Advantage,  bon-um,  -i. 
Advice,  consili-um,  -i. 
Adviser,  auctor,  -is. 
Age,  old,  senectu-s,  -tis. 
Aid,  auxili-um,  -i. 
Alban,  Alban-us,  -i. 
Alcibiades,  Alcibiad-es,  -is. 
Alexander,  Alexand-er,  -ri. 
Alliance,  societa-s,  -tis. 
Ally,  soci-us,  -i. 


Alps,  Alp-es,  -ium. 
Altar,  ar-a,  -ae. 
Ambassador,  legat-us,  -i. 
Ammunition,  missili-a,  -um. 
Ancestors,  major-es,  -um. 
Anger,  ir-a,  -ae. 
Animal,  animal,  -is. 
Anyone  (in  a  negative  sentence), 

quisquam,  cujusquam  . 
Anything  (in  a  negative  sentence), 

quicquam,  neut.  of  quisquam. 
Apple,  pom-um,  -i. 
Aristotle,  Aristotel-es,  -is. 
Arms,  arm-a,  -orum. 
Army,  exercit-us,  -us  • 
Arrow,  sagitt-a,  -ae. 


130 


VOCABULARIES 


Art,  ar-s,  -tis. 
Assistance,  auxili-um,  -i. 
Athenian,  Atheniens-is,  -is. 
Athens,  Athen-ae,  -aram. 
Attention,  oper-a,  -ae. 
Axe,  secur-is,  -is  (abl.  -i). 

Bank,  rip-a,  -ae. 
Barbarian,  barbar-us,  -i. 
Baseness,  turpitud-o,  -mis. 
Battle,  praeli-um,  -i. 
Beginning,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 
Behalf    of,    on,  see  Vocabulary 

of  Prepositions. 
Betrayer,  proditor,  -is. 
Blockade,  obsidio,  -nis. 
Blow,  ict-us,  -us. 
Body,  corp-us,  -oris. 
Book,  lib-er,  -ri. 
Bottom,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 
Boy,  puer,  -i. 
Bracelet,  armill-a,  -ae. 
Bravery,  fortitud-o,  -mis. 
Bread,  pan-is,  -is. 
Bridge,  pon-s,  -tis. 
Britain,  Britanni-a,  -ae. 
Brother,  frat-er,  -ris. 
Building,  aedifici-um,  -i. 
Burden,  on-us,  -eris. 

Caesar,  Caesar,  -is 
Calamity,  calamita-s,  -tis. 
Camp,  castr-a,  -orum. 
Campanian,  Campan-us,  -i. 
Capitol,  Capitoli-um,  -i. 
Captive,  captiv-us,  -i. 
Care,  cur-a,  -ae. 
Carthage,  Carthag-o,  -mis. 
Carthaginian,  Poen-us,  -i. 
Cavalry,  equitat-us,  -us. 
Centre,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 
Centurion,  centurio,  -nis. 
Century,  secul-um,  -i. 
Children,  liber-i,  ^orum. 
Cicero,  Cicero,  -nis. 
Circumstance,  re-s,  -i. 
Citadel,  ar-x,  -cis. 
Citizen,  civ-is,  -is. 


City,  urb-s,  -is. 

Coast,  or-a,  -ae. 

Cohort,  cohor-s,  -tis. 

Colleague,  colleg-a,  -ae. 

Comet,  comet-es,  -ae. 

Command,  imperi-um,  -i. 

Commander,  imperator,  -is. 

Condition,  conditio,  -nis. 

Conference,  colloqui-um,  -i. 

Confidence,  fiduci-a,  -ae. 

Confusion,  trepidatio,  -nis. 

Conqueror,  victor,  -is. 

Conspirator,  conjurator,  -is. 

Consul,  consul,  -is. 

Consulship,  consulat-us,  -us. 

Contest,  certam-en,  -mis. 

Control  over,  without,  see 
Vocabulary  of  Adjectives. 

Corinth,  Corinth-us,  -i. 

Corn,  frument-um,  -i. 

Countenance,  vult-us,  -us. 

Country  (  =  native  land),  patri-a, 
-ae. 

Country  (as  opposed  to  '  town '), 
ru-s,  -ris. 

Country-house,  vill-a,  -ae. 

Countryman  (=  fellow-country- 
man), civ-is,  -is. 

Coward,  ignav-us,  -i. 

Cowardice,  ignavi-a,  -ae. 

Crime,  scel-us,  -eris. 

Cunctator,  Cunctator,  -is. 

Cursor,  Cursor,  -is. 

Damage,  damn-um,  -i. 

Danger,  pericul-um,  -i. 

Daughter,  fili-a,  -ae. 

Day,  die-s,  -i. 

Deal,    a    good,    see    Chap,    v, 

Sec.  2. 

Death,  mor-s,  -tis. 
Decemvirs,  decemvir-i,  -orum. 
Decree,  decret-um,  -i. 
Deed,  fact-urn,  -i. 
Defeat,  clad-es,  -is. 
Defence,  praesidi-um,  -i. 
Deliverer,  liberator,  -is. 
Deserter,  transfug-a,  -ae. 


TO  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX.         131 


Desire,  cupid-o,  -mis. 
Destruction,  exiti-um,  -i. 
Device,  artifici-um,  -i. 
Dictator,  dictator,  -is. 
Difference,  to  make  a,  see  Chap. 

vi,  Sec.  2. 

Diligence,  diligenti-a,  -ae. 
Disgrace,  ignomini-a,  -ae. 
Disposition,  anim-us,  -i. 
District,  regio,  -iris. 
Ditch,  foss-a,  -ae. 
Duty,  offici-um,  -i ;  it  is  the  duty 

of,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  2. 

Eagerness,  alacrita-s,  -tis. 
Earth,  terr-a,  -ae. 
Elephant,  elephant-us,  -i. 
Eloquence,  eloquenti-a,  -ae. 
End,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 
Energy,  alacrita-s,  -tis. 
Engine,  machin-a,  -ae. 
England,  Angli-a,  -ae. 
Euphrates,  Euphrat-es,  -is. 
Evil,  mal-um,  -i. 
Example,  exempl-um,  -i. 
Eye,  ocut-us,  -i. 

Farm-house,  vill-a,  -ae. 

Father,  pat-er,  -ris. 

Fault,  culp-a.  -ae. 

Fear,  timor,  -is. 

Feeling,  sens-us,  -us. 

Felix,  Feli-x,  -cis. 

Fellow- soldier,  commilito,  -nis. 

Fetial,  fetial-is,  -is. 

Fight,  pugn-a,  -ae. 

Fire,  incendi-um,  -i. 

Firmness,  constanti-a,  -ae. 

Fleet,  class-is,  -is. 

Food,  cib-us,  -i. 

Fool,  stult-us,  -i. 

Foot,  pe-s,  -dis. 

Force,  vis,  ace.  vim,  abl.  vi. 

Forces,  copi-ae,  -arum. 

Foresight,  providenti-a,  -ae. 

Fort,  castell-um,  -i. 

Fortification,  munitio,  -nis. 

Fortitude,  fortitud-o,  -mis. 


Fortune,  fortun-a,  -ae. 
Fraud,  frau-s,  -dis. 
Friend,  amic-us,  -i. 
Front,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 

Ganges,  Gang-es,  -is. 

Garden,  hort-us,  -i. 

Gate,  port-a,  -ae. 

Gaul  (name  of  country),  Galli-a, 

-ae. 
Gaul  (inhabitant  of  the  country), 

Gall-us,  -i. 
General,  du-x,  -cis ;    imperator, 

-is. 

Genius,  ingeni-um,  -i. 
Gift,  don-um,  -i. 
Glory,  glori-a,  -ae. 
God,  De-us,  -i. 
Goods,  bon-a,  -orum. 
Goodwill,  volunta-s,  -tis. 
Greece,  Graeci-a,  -ae. 
Greek,  Graec-us,  -i. 
Groan,  gemit-us,  -us. 
Ground,  terr-a,  -ae  ;  hum-us,  -i. 

Hannibal,  Hannibal,  -is. 

Hasdrubal,  Hasdrubal,  -is. 

Hatred,  odi-um,  -i. 

Health,  valetud-o,  -mis. 

Hearth,  foc-us,  -i. 

Heir,  here-s,  -dis. 

Help,  auxili-um,  -i. 

Herb,  herb-a,  -ae. 

Hill,  coil-is,  -is. 

Himself  (in  apposition  with  a 
noun),  ips-e,  -ius. 

Himself  (in  any 'case  except  no- 
minative ;  referring  to  subject  of 
the  clause),  se,  sui,  etc. 

Home,  dom-us,  -us. 

Honour,  honor,  -is. 

Hope,  spe-s,  -i. 

Horace,  Horati-us,  -i. 

Horse,  equ-us,  -i. 

Horseman,  equ-es,  -itis. 

Hostage,  obs-es,  -idis. 

Hour,  hor-a,  -ae. 


K  2 


132 


VOCABULARIES 


House,  dom-us,  -us. 
Hunger,  fam-es,  -is. 

Ignominy,  ignomini-a,  -ae. 

Ill,  mal-um,  -i. 

Importance,  see  Chap.  VI,  Sees. 

i  and  2. 

Individuals,  singul-i,  -orum. 
Infantry,  peditat-us,  -us. 
Influence,  auctorita-s,  -tis. 
Injury   (  =  harm),   detriment-um, 

~*» 

Injury  (  =  wrong"),  injuri-a,  -ae. 
Insult,  contumeli-a,  -ae. 
Island,  insul-a,  -ae. 
Italy,  Itali-a,  -ae. 

Journey,  it-er,  -ineris. 

Kind,  gen-us,  -eris. 
Kindness,  benevolenti-a,  -ae. 
King,  re-x,  -gis. 
Kingdom,  regn-um,  -i. 
Knowledge,  scienti-a,  -ae. 

Labour,  labor,  -is. 
Lacedaemonian,     Lacedaemoni- 

us,  -i. 

Lake,  lac-us,  -us. 
Land  (  =  country),  terr-a,  -ae. 
Lands,  agr-i,  -orum. 
Language,  lingu-a,  -ae. 
Latin,  Latin-us,  -i. 
Law,  le-x,  -gis. 
Leader,  du-x,  -cis. 
Learning,  doctrin-a,  -ae. 
Legion,  legio,  -nis. 
Leisure,  oti-um,  -i. 
Lesbos,  Lesb-us,  -i. 
Letter  (of  the  alphabet),  litter-a, 

-ae. 
Letter  ( =  epistle),  litter-ae,  -arum  ; 

epistol-a,  -ae. 
Levy,  delect-us,  -us. 
Liberty,  liberta-s,  -tis. 
Lictor,  lictor,  -is. 
Lieutenant,  legat-us,  -i. 
Life,  vit-a,  -ae. 


Limb,  membr-um,  -i. 

Line  of  battle,  acie-s,  -i. 

Line  of  march,  agm-en,  -inis. 

Literature,  litter-ae,  -arum. 

Little,  a  (qualifying  a  compara- 
tive or  superlative),  see  Chap,  v, 
Sec.  2. 

Livy,  Livi-us,  -i. 

London,  Londini-um,  -i. 

Lord,  domin-us,  -i. 

Loss,  clad-es,  -is. 

Lot,  sor-s,  -tis. 

Love,  amor,  -is. 

Lover,  use  pres.  part,  of  amo. 

Macedonian,  Maced-o,  -onis. 

Magistrate,  magistrat-us,  -us. 

Maidservant,  serv-a,  -ae. 

Man  (as  opposed  to  woman),  vir, 
-i. 

Man  (  =  human  being),  hom-o, 
-mis. 

Manners,  mor-es,  -um. 

Mark  of,  it  is  a,  see  Chap. 
VI,  Sec.  2. 

Master  (  =  schoolmaster),  magist- 
er,  -ri. 

Matter,  re-s,  -i. 

Means,  by  no,  see  Vocabulary  of 
Adverbs. 

Meat,  car-o,  -nis. 

Mercy,  clementi-a,  -ae. 

Midst  of,  in  the,  see  Vocabulary 
of  Prepositions. 

Miles,  millia  passuum,  lit.  thou- 
sands of  paces. 

Mind,  anim-us,  -i. 

Misery,  miseri-a,  -ae. 

Money,  pecuni-a,  -ae. 

Month,  mens-is,  -is. 

Mother,  mat-er,  -ris. 

Mound,  tumul-us,  -i. 

Mount        ) 

Mountain  (  mon-S>  'tls-  ^ 

Multitude,  multitud-o,  -inis. 

Myself  (in  any  case  except  nomi- 
native ;  referring  to  subject  of 
the  clause),  me,  mei,  etc. 


TO  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX.        133 


Name,  nom-en,  -Tnis. 

Naples,  Neapol-is,  -is. 

Nation,  gen-s,  -tis. 

Nature  of,  it  is  the,  see  Chap. 

VI,  Sec.  2. 
Need    of,    to    have,   see    Chap. 

v,  Sec.  3. 

Neglect,  negligenti-a,  -ae. 
News,  nunci-us,  -i. 

nem-o,  ace.  -inem.  For 
Nobody  the  gen.  and  abl.  nul- 
No  one  lius  and  nullo  are 

used. 

Nothing,  nihil,  indeclinable. 
Number,  numer-us,  -i. 

Oar,  rem-us,  -i. 
Obligation,  religio,  -nis. 
Obstinacy,  pertinaci-a,  -ae. 
Office,  magistrat-us,  -us. 
Old  age,  senectu-s,  -tis. 
Old  man,  sen-ex,  -is. 
Opinion,  sententi-a,  -ae. 
Opportunity,  occasio,  -nis. 

Pace,  pass-us,  -us. 

Pain,  dolor,  -is. 

Pardon,  veni-a,  -ae. 

Parent,  paren-s,  -tis. 

Part,  pai-s,  -tis  ;  it  is  the  part 

of,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  2. 
Pass,  salt-us,  -us. 
Passion,  appetit-us,  -us. 
Patience,  patienti-a,  -ae. 
Peace,  pa-x,  -cis. 
Penalty,  poen-ae,  -arum. 
People  (  =  nation),  popul-us.  -i. 
Persian,  Pers-a,  -ae. 
Pestilence,  pest-is,  -is. 
Philip,  Philipp-us,  -i. 
Philosopher,  philosoph-us,  -i. 
Philosophy,  philosophi-a,  -ae. 
Piety,  pieta-s,  -tis. 
Pity,  misericordi-a,  -ae. 
Plain,  camp-us,  -i. 
Plan,  consili-um,  -i, 
Plato,  Plato,  -nis. 
Pleasure,  volupta-s,  -tis. 


Plebs,  pleb-s,  -is. 

Plunder,  praed-a,  -ae. 

Pluto,  Pluto,  -nis. 

Po,  Pad-us,  -i. 

Pompey,  Pompei-us,  -i. 

Pontiff,  pontif-ex,  -icis. 

Possession  of,  to  gain  or  get; 

see  Vocabulary  of  Verbs. 
Post,  static,  -nis. 
Power,  potenti-a,  -ae. 
Praise,  lau-s,  -dis. 
Prefect,  praefect-us,  -i. 
Present,  don-um,  -i. 
Prey,  praed-a,  -ae. 
Property,  cens-us,  -us. 
Proserpine,  Proserpin-a,  -ae. 
Protection,  tutel-a,  -ae. 
Province,  provinci-a,  -ae. 
Provisions,  commeat-us,  -uum. 
Prudence,  prudenti-a,  -ae. 
Punishment,  poen-a,  -ae. 
Pupil,  discipul-us,  -i. 

Rampart,  agger,  -is. 
Rashness,  temerita-s,  -tis. 
Readiness,  alacrita-s,  -tis. 
Rear,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 
Remedy,  remedi-um,  -i. 
Rest,   the,   ceter-i,    -ovum ;    the 

rest  of,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 
Retreat,  recept-us,  -us. 
Reward,  praemi-um,  -i. 
Rhone,  Rhodan-us,  -i. 
Riches,  diviti-ae,  -arum. 
River,  flum-en,  -mis. 
Rock,  rup-es,  -is. 
Roman,  Roman-us,  -i. 
Rome,  Rom-a,  -ae. 
Root,  radi-x,  -cis. 
Rush,  impet-us,  -us. 

Sabine,  Sabin-us,  -i. 

Safety,  salu-s,  -tis. 

Sake  of,  for  the,  causa  (abl.  of 

causa),  with  gen.  before  it. 
Samnite,  Samni-s,  -tis. 
Samos,  Sam-us,  -i. 


J34 


VOCABULARIES 


Sapiens,  Sapien-s,  -tis. 
Scarcity,  inopi-a,  -ae. 
Scipio,  Scipio,  -nis. 
Scout,  explorator,  -is. 
Sea,  mar-e,  -is. 
Senate,  senat-us,  -us. 


Service,  us-us,  -us. 

Shame,  pudor,  -is. 

Shield,  clipe-us,  -i. 

Ship,  nav-is,  -is. 

Shout,  clamor,  -is. 

Sign  of,  it  is  a,  see  Chap,  vi, 

Sec.  2. 

Signal,  sign-um,  -i. 
Sister,  soror,  -is. 
Skill,  scienti-a,  -ae. 
Skin,  pell-is,  -is. 
Slaughter,  caed-es,  -is. 
Slave,  serv-us,  -i. 
Slavery,  servitu-s,  -tis. 
Sling,  fund  -us,  -i. 
Socrates,  Socrat-es,  -is. 
Soldier,  mil-es,  -itis. 
Something,  aliquid  (neut.  of  ali- 

quis). 

Son,  fili-us,  -i. 
Sorrow,  dolor,  -is. 
Spartan,  Lacedaemoni-us,  -i. 
Spear,  hast-a,  -ae. 
Speech  (  =  language),  lingu-a,  -ae. 
Speech  (  =  oration),  oratio,  -nis. 
Spirit,  anim-us,  -i. 
Spoils,  spoli-a,  -orum. 
Sport,  ludibri-um,  -i. 
Spot  (  =  place),  loc-us,  -i. 
Standard,  sign-um,  -i. 
State     (  =  commonwealth),     res- 

publica,  reipublicae. 
Statue,  statu-a,  -ae. 
Stature,  statur-a,  -ae. 
Stoic,  Stoic-us,  -i. 
Storm,  tempesta-s,  -tis. 
Strength,  vir-es,  -ium. 
Summer,  aesta-s,  -tis. 
Supplies,  commeat-us,  -uum. 
Support,  subsidi-um,  -i. 


Surname,  cognom-en,  -mis. 
Surrender,  deditio,  -nis. 
Swiftness,  celerita-s,  -tis. 
Sword,  gladi-us,  i. 

Talent,  ingeni-um,  -i. 
Talkativeness,  loquacita-s,  -tis. 
Tarentine,  Tarentin-us,  -i. 
Tarquin,  Tarquini-us,  -i. 
Task,  op-us,  -eris. 
Temple,  templ-um,  -i. 
Terms,  condition-es,  -um. 
Territory,      fin-es,      -ium      (lit. 

borders). 

Terror,  terror,  -is. 
Thebes,  Theb-ae,  -arum. 
Themselves,  see  '  himself.' 
Thermopylae,       Thermopyl-ae, 

-arum. 

Thing,  re-s,  -i. 
Thousands,  milli-a,  -um. 
Tiber,  Tiber-is,  -is. 
Tigris,  Tigr-is,  -is. 
Time,  temp-us,  -oris. 
Title,  nom-en,  -mis. 
Toil,  labor,  -is. 
Top,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 
Tower,  turr-is,  -is. 
Town,  oppid-um,  -i. 


Treaty,  foed-us,  -eris. 
Tree,  arbor,  -is. 
Tribune,  tribun-us,  -i. 
Two  days,  bidu-um,  -i. 
Tyrant,  tyrann-us,  -i. 

Undertaking,  incept-um,  -i. 
Use,  us-us,  -us. 

Valley,  vall-is,  -is. 
Valour,  virtu-s,  -tis. 
Value,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  i. 
Varro,  Varro,  -nis. 
Victory,  victori-a,  -ae. 
Virtue,  virtu-s,  -tis. 
Voice,  vo-x,  -cis. 


TO  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX.       135 


Volscian,  Volsc-us,  -i. 
Vote,  suffragi-um,  -i. 

Wall,  mur-us,  -i. 

Want  of,  to  be  in,  see  Vocabu- 
lary of  Verbs. 

War,  bell-um,  -i. 

Warfare,  militi-a,  -ae. 

Way,  vi-a,  -ae. 

Weapon,  tel-um,  -i. 

Welfare,  salu-s,  -tis. 

Which,  relative,  qui,  quae,  quod. 

Who,  interrogative,  quis,  cujus. 

Who,  relative,  qui,  quae,  quod. 

Wrife,  uxor,  -is. 

Will,  volunta-s,  -tis. 

Wing  (of  an  army),  corn-u,  -us. 

"Winter,  hiem-s,  -is. 

Winter  quarters,  hibern-a, 
-orum. 


Wisdom,  sapientt-a,  -ae. 
Woman,  mulier,  -is. 
Wool,  lan-a,  -ae. 
Word,  verb-um,  -i. 
Work,  op-us,  -eris. 
Worth,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  i. 
Writer,  scriptor,  -is. 
Wrong,  injuri-a,  -ae. 

Year,  ann-us,  -i. 

Young  man,  adolescen-s,  -tis. 

Yourself  (in  apposition  with 
'  you'),  ips-e,  -a,  -um. 

Yourself  (in  any  case  except  the 
nominative ;  referring  to  sub- 
ject of  the  clause),  te,  tui,  etc. 

Youth,  juvent-a,  -ae. 

Zeal,  studi-um,  -i. 


2.  ADJECTIVES. 


[In  this  Vocabulary  will  be  found  all  words  used  in  the  exercises 
which  qualify  nouns,  including  the  possessive,  demonstrative,  and  some 
other  so-called  pronouns.] 


Able,  to  be,  see  Vocabulary  of 

Verbs. 

Accused,  re-us,  -a,  -um. 
Aegean,  Aegae-us,  -a,  -um. 
Agreed,  it  is,  see  Vocabulary  of 

Verbs. 

All,  omn-is,  -e. 
Alone,  sol-us,  -a,  -um. 
Angry,  irat-us,  -a,  -um ;   to  be 

angry,  see  Vocabulary  of  Verbs. 
Appian,  Appi-us,  -a,  -um. 
Ashamed,  to  be,  see  Chap,  vi, 

Sec.  5. 

Bad,  mal-us,  -a,  -um. 
Base,  turp-is,  -e. 
Beautiful,  pulch-er,  -ra,  -rum. 
Bereft,  orb-us,  -a,  -um. 


Blind,  caec-us,  -a,  -um. 
Born,  see  Vocabulary  of  Verbs. 
Brave,  fort-is,  -e. 
Broad,  lat-us,  -a,  -um. 


Capable  of  enduring,  pres.  part. 

of  patior,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  4. 
Captive,  captiv-us,  -a,  -um. 
Cautious,  caut-us,  -a,  -um. 
Certain  (  =  sure),  cert-us,  -a,  -um. 
Cheerful,  alac-er,  -ris,  -re. 
Confident,  to  be,  see  Vocabulary 

of  Verbs. 


Control     over,    without,      im- 

poten-s,  gen.  -tis. 


136 


VOCABULARIES 


Dangerous,  periculos-us,  -a,  -um. 
Dead,  mortu-us,  -a,  -um. 
Deaf,  surd-us,  -a,  -um. 
Dear,  car-us,  -a,  -um. 
Deep,  alt-us,  -a,  -um. 
Desirable,  optabil-is,  -e. 
Desirous,  cupid-us,  -a,  -um. 
Difficult,  difficil-is,  -e. 
Disgraceful,  turp-is,  -e. 
Disgusted     with,    to     be,    see 

Chap.  VI,  Sec.  5. 
Distant,  to   be,   see  Vocabulary 

of  Verbs. 

Distinguished,  insign-is,  -e. 
Dumb,  mut-us,  -a,  -um. 

Easy,  facil-is,  -e. 

Elated,  elat-us,  -a,  -um. 

Elder,  maj-or,  -us  (with  or  with- 
out '  natu '). 

Endued,  praedit-us,  -a,  -um. 

Enough,  satis,  indeclinable ;  see 
Chap.  VI,  Sec.  3. 

Evident,  it  is,  see  Vocabulary  of 
Verbs. 

Evil,  mal-us,  -a,  -um. 

Excellent,  egregi-us,  -a,  -um. 

Fair,  aequ-us,  -a,  -um. 
False,  fals-us,  -a,  -um. 
Fertile,  fecund-us,  -a,  -um. 
Few,  pauc-i,  -ae,  -a. 
Fifteen,  quindecim,  indeclinable. 
Fifty,  quinquaginta,  indeclinable. 
First,  prim-us,  -a,  -um. 
Following     (qualifying     'day'}, 

poster-us,  -a,  -um. 
Foreign,  extern-us,  -a,  -um. 
Forgetful,  immemor,  gen.  -is. 
Former,  pri-or,  -us. 
Free,  liber,  -a,  -um. 
Friendly,  amic-us,  -a,  -um. 
Full,  plen-us,  -a,  -um. 

Glorious,  praeclar-us,  -a,  -um. 
Good,  bon-us,  -a,  -um. 
Great,  magn-us,  -a,  -um. 


Greek,  Graec-us,  -a,  -um. 
Guilty,  son-s,  gen.  -tis. 

Happy,  beat-us,  -a,  -um. 

Heavy,  grav-is,  -e. 

High,  alt-us,  -a,  -um ;    of  high 

value,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  i. 
His  (referring  to  subject  of  clause), 

su-us,  -a,  -um. 
His   (not  referring   to  subject   of 

clause),  genitive  of  is,  ea,  id. 
Horrible,  foed-us,  -a,  -um. 
Humble,  humil-is,  -e. 

Illustrious,  clar-us,  -a,  -um. 
Implacable,  implacabil-is,  -e. 
Important,  to  be,  see  Chap.  vi. 

Sec.  2. 

Inactive,  iner-s,  gen.  -tis. 
Injurious,  to  be,  see  Vocabulary 

of  Verbs. 
Innocent,  innocen-s,  gen.  -tis. 

Lacedaemonian,  Lacedaemoni- 
us,  -a,  -um. 

Land,  pedest-er,  -ris,  -re. 

Large,  magn-us,  -a,  -um. 

Latin,  Latin-us,  -a,  -um. 

Learned,  doct-us,  -a,  -um. 

Less,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3  ;  at 
least,  see  Vocabulary  o'f  Ad- 
verbs. 

Ligurian,  Ligustic-us,  -a,  -um. 

Like,  simil-is,  -e. 

Little,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 

Long,  long-us,  -a,  -um. 

Loud,  magn-us,  -a,  -um. 

Low,  humil-is,  -e. 

Many,  mult-i,  -ae,  -a. 
Mindful,  memor,  gen.  -is. 
Moderate,  modic-us,  -a,  -um. 
Mountain,  montan-us,  -a,  -um. 
Much,    mult-us,    -a,    -um ;    too 

much,    nimi-us,    -a,    -um,    see 

Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 

Narrow,  angust-us,  -a,  -um. 


TO  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX.        137 


Nearest,  proxim-us,  -a,  -urn. 
Neglectful,  pres.  part,  of  neglig-o, 

-ere,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  4. 
New,  nov-us,  -a,  -um. 
Next  (  =  following),  poster-us,  -a, 

-um. 
No,   null-us,   -a,    -um.     See  also 

Chap,  vi,  Sec.  3. 
Noble,  praeclar-us,  -a,  -um. 
None,  null-us,  -a,  -um. 

Old  (old  man),  see  Vocabulary  of 
Nouns.    • 


Other,  ali-us,  -a,  -ud  ;  the  other 

(of  two),  alter,  -a,  -um. 
Own,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  i. 

Pitiable,  miserabil-is,  -e. 
Pleasant,  jucund-us,  -a,  -um. 
Poor,  pauper,  gen.  -is. 
Powerful,  poten-s,  gen.  -tis. 
Private,  privat-us,  -a,  -um. 
Prudent,  pruden-s,  gen.  -tis. 
Punic,  Punic-us,  -a,  -um. 

Beady,  parat-us,  -a,  -um  ;  to  get 
ready,  see  Vocabulary  of  Verbs. 

Relying  on,  fret-us,  -a,  -um. 

Remarkable,  insign-is,  -e. 

Rich,  div-es,  gen.  -ids. 

Right  (the  opposite  of  'left'), 
dext-er,  -ra,  -rum. 

Roman,  Roman-us,  -a,  -um. 

Safe,  tut-us,  -a,  -um. 

Same,  idem,  eadem,  idem. 

Savage,  fer-us,  -a,  -um. 

Sea,  maritim-us,  -a,  -um. 

Second,  secund-us,  -a,  -um. 

Serious,  grav-is,  -e. 

Seven,  septem,  indeclinable. 

Several,  aliquot,  indeclinable. 

Short,  brev-is,  -e. 

Silent,  to  be,  see  Vocabulary  of 

Verbs. 
Single,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  i. 


Six,  sex,  indeclinable. 
Skilful,  perit-us,  -a,  -um. 
Sluggish,  pig-er,  -ra,  -rum. 
Small,  parv-us,  -a,  -um. 
So  great,  tant-us,  -a,  -um. 
So  many,  tot,  indeclinable. 
Soft,  moll-is,  -e. 

Some,  nonnull-i,   -ae,  -a  ;  some 
•  —  others,  ali-i  —  ali-i  (-ae,  -a). 
Spartan,  Lacedaemoni-us,  -a,  -um. 
Strange,  inusitat-us,  -a,  -um. 
Strong,  robust-us,  -a,  -um. 
Successful,  feli-x,  gen.  -cis. 
Such,  tal-is,  -e. 
Suited,  apt-us,  -a,  -um. 
Sweet,  dulc-is,  -e. 

Tarpeian,  Tarpei-us,  -a,  -um. 
Ten,  decem,  indeclinable. 
Tenth,  decim-us,  -a,  -um. 
That   (answered    by   '  which  '   or 

'  who'),  is,  ea,  id. 
That     (contrasted    with    'this'), 

il-le,  -la,  -lud. 
This,  hie,  haec,  hoc. 
Their    (referring    to    subject  '  of 

clause),  su-us,  -a,  -um. 
Their  (not  referring  to  subject  of 

clause),  gen.  plur.  of  is,  ea,  id. 
Third,  terti-us,  -a,  -um. 
Thirty,  triginta,  indeclinable.    ' 
Three,  tr-es,  -ia. 

Three  hundred,  trecent-i,  -ae,  -a. 
Tired,  fess-us,  -a,  -um. 


Troublesome,  molest-us,  -a,  -um. 

True,  ver-us,  -a,  -um. 

Two,  du-o,  -ae,  -o. 

Two    days,   see    Vocabulary    of 

Nouns. 
Two  hundred,  ducent-i,  -ae,  -a. 

Unfriendly,  inimic-us,  -a,  -um. 
Ungrateful,  ingrat-us,  -a,  -um. 
Unharmed,  incolum-is,  -e. 
Unhealthy,  insalubr-is,  -e. 
Unheard,  inaudit-us,  -a,  -um. 


i38 


VOCABULARIES 


Unknown,  incognit-us,  -a,  -urn. 
Unlike,  dissimil-is,  -e. 
Unoccupied,  vacu-us,  -a,  -um. 
Unwilling,  to  be,  see  Vocabulary 

of  Verbs. 

Unworthy,  indign-us,  -a,  -um. 
Useful,  util-is,  -e. 
Useless,  inutil-is,  -e. 

"Wanting,  to  be,  see  Vocabulary 

of  Verbs. 

"Warm,  calid-us,  -a,  -um. 
Waste,  to  lay,  see  Vocabulary  of 

Verbs. 

"Weak,  infirm-us,  -a,  -um. 
"Weary,  to  be,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  5. 


"Weighty,  grav-is,  -e. 

"What,   interrogative,   qui,    quae, 

quod. 

"Whole,  tot-us,  -a,  -um. 
"Winter    (winter    quarters),     see 

Vocabulary  of  Nouns. 
"Wise,  sapien-s,  gen.  -tis. 
"Without    control    over,   impo- 

ten-s,  gen.  -tis. 

Wonderful,  mir-us,  -a,  -um. 
Wont,  to  be,  see  Vocabulary  of 

Verbs. 
Worthy,  dign-us,  -a,  -um. 

Young  (young  man),  see  Vocabu- 
lary of  Nouns. 


3.  VEBBS. 

[Where  only  the  pres.  indie,  and  infin.  of  a  verb  are  given,  the  perf. 
and  sup.  may  be  formed  regularly.] 


Able,  to  be,  pos-sum,  -se,  potui, 

no  sup. 

Abound,  abund-o,  -are. 
Accomplish,      per-fic-io,      -ere, 

-fec-i,  -turn. 
Accuse,  accus-o,  -are. 
Acquit,  ab-solv-o,  -ere,  -i,  -solu- 

tum. 
Advance,  pro-gred-ior,  -i,  -gres- 

sus  sum. 

Affirm,  affirm-o,  -are. 
Agreed,  it  is,  const-at,  -are,  -itit. 
Alarm,  perterr-eo,  -ere. 
Allow,  pat-ior,  -i,  passus  sum. 
Amend,     cor-rig-o,     -ere,     -rexi, 

-rectum. 
Angry,  to  be,  irasc-or,  -i,  iratus 

sum. 

Announce,  nunci-o,  -are. 
Answer,    respon-deo,    -dere,   -di, 

-sum. 
Appoint,  con-stitu-o,  -ere,  -i,  -sti- 

tutum. 
Approach,  appropinqu-o,  -are. 


Approve,  prob-o,  -are. 

Arm,  arm-o,  -are. 

Arrive,    ad-ven-io,    -ire,    -ven-i, 

-turn. 
Ashamed,  to  be,  see  Chap,  vi, 

Sec.  5. 

Ask,  rog-o,  -are. 
Assail,  oppugn-o,  -are. 
Assemble,  con-ven-io,  -ire,  -ven-i, 

-turn. 

Attach,  adjun-go,  -gere,  -xi,  -ctum. 
Attack,  oppugn-o,  -are. 
Avenge,  ulcisc-or,  -i,  ultus  sum. 
Avoid,  vit-o,  -are. 


Bear,  fer-o,  -re,  tuli,  latum. 
Beat,  caed-o,  -ere,  cecldi,  caesum. 
Become,  fi-o,  -eri,  factus  sum.  ' 
Believe,  cred-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum. 
Besiege,    ob-sid-eo,    -ere,     -sedi, 

-sessum, 

Betray,  prod-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum. 
Bid,  jub-eo,  -ere,  juss-i,  -um. 


TO  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX.        139 


Blockade,   ob-sid-eo,  -ere,   -sedi, 

-sessum. 
Born,    to   be,  nasc-or,    -i,  natus 

sum. 
Bring,    affer-o,    -re,   attuli,   alla- 

tum. 
Bring    on,    infer-o,    -re,     intuli, 

illatum. 

Build,  aedific-o,  -are. 
Burn  (intrans.),  ar-deo,  -dere,  -si, 

-sum. 

Bury,  sepel-io,  -ire,  -ivi,  sepultum. 
Butcher,  trucid-o,  -are. 
Buy,  em-o,  -ere,  em-i,  -ptum. 

Call,  voc-o,  -are. 

Can,  pos-sum,  -se,  potui,  no  sup. 

Capture,  cap-io,  -ere,  cepi,  cap- 
turn. 

Carry  away  from,  aufer-o,  -re, 
abstuli,  ablatum. 

Cheer,  e-rig-o,  -ere,  -rexi,  -rec- 
tum. 

Choose,  de-lig-o,  -ere,  -legi,  -lec- 
tum. 

Climb  up,  scan-do,  -dere,  -di, 
-sum. 

Come,  ven-io,  -ire,  ven-i,  -turn. 

Command,  imper-o,  -are. 

Compel,  cog-o,  -ere,  co-egi,  -ac- 
tum. 

Concerns,  it,  inter-est,  -esse,  -fuit ; 
re-fert,  -ferre,  -tulit ;  see  Chap, 
vi,  Sec.  2. 

Condemn,  damn-o,  -are. 

Confess,  con-fit-eor,  -eri,  -fessus 
sum. 

Confident,  to  be,  con-fid-o,  -ere, 
-fisus  sum. 

Conquer,  vinc-o,  -ere,  vic-i,  -turn. 

Consider,  hab-eo,  -ere. 

Conspire,  conjur-o,  -are. 

Construct,  constru-o,  -ere,  -xi, 
-ctum. 

Contain,  hab-eo,  -ere. 

Convict,  con-vinc-o,  -ere,  -vic-i, 
-turn. 

Create,  cre-o,  -are. 


Cross,  trans-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum. 
Crush,  obru-o,  -ere,  -i,  -turn. 
Cry  out,  clam-o,  -are. 
Cultivate,  col-o,  -ere,  -ui,  cultum. 

Dare,  aud-eo,  -ere,  ausus  sum. 
Deceive,    de-cip-io,   -ere,    -cep-i, 

-turn. 

Dedicate,  dedic-o,  -are. 
Defeat,  pell-o,  -ere,  pepuli,  pul- 

sum. 

Deliberate,  deliber-o,  -are. 
Delight,  delect-o,  -are. 
Demand,   posc-o,    -ere,    poposci, 

no  sup. 

Deny,  neg-o,  -are. 
Depart,     disce-do,     -dere,     -ssi, 

-ssum. 

Deprive,  priv-o,  -are. 
Desert,  deser-o,  -ere,  -ui,  -turn. 
Desire,  cup-io,  -ere,  -ivi,  -Itum. 
Despair,  desper-o,  -are. 
Despise,   contem-no,  -nere,  -psi, 

-ptum. 

Destroy,  perd-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum. 
Deter,  deterr-eo,  -ere. 
Determine,    stat-uo,    -uere,    -ui, 

-utum. 
Die,  mor-ior,  -i,  -tuus  sum;   fut. 

part,  moriturus. 
Disgusted  with,  to  be,  see  Chap. 

VI,  Sec.  c. 
Dismiss,   di-mitt-o,   -ere,    -mis-i, 

-sum. 

Dispute,  disput-o,  -are. 
Distant,  to  be,  dist-o,  -are.    . 
Do,  fac-io,  -ere,  feci,  factum. 
Drink,  bib-o,  -ere,  -i,  no  sup. 
Drive,  pell-o,  -ere,  pepuli,   pul- 

sum. 
Drive   back,  repell-o,  -ere,  rep- 

puli,  repulsum. 
Dwell,  habit-o,  -are. 

Employ,  ut-or,  -i,  usus  sum. 
Encourage,  hort-or,  -ari. 
Endure,  pat-ior,  -i,  passus  sum. 
Enjoy,  fru-or,  -i,  -itus  sum. 


140 


VOCABULARIES 


Enter,    in-gred-ior,    -i,    -gressus 

sum. 
Entrust,  com-mitt-o,  -e"re,  -mis-i, 

-sum. 

Equip,  arm-o,  -are. 
Escape,  ef-fug-io,   -ere,  -fugi,  no 

sup. ;  trans,  or  intrans. 
Esteem,  aestim-o,  -are. 
Evident,  it  is,  appar-et,  -ere. 
Exchange,  mut-o,  -are. 
Exhort,  hort-or,  -ari. 
Expel,  ex-pell-o,  -ere,  -pul-i,  -sum. 

Fail,  de-fic-io,  -ere,  -fec-i,  -turn. 
Fall,  cad-o,  -ere,  cecidi,  casum. 
Favour,  fav-eo,  -ere,  favi,  fautum. 
Fear,  tim-eo,  -ere. 
Feed  on,  vesc-or,  -i,  no  perf.  or 

sup. 

Feel,  sen-tio,  -tire,  -si,  -sum. 
Fight,  pugn-o,  -are. 
Fill,  repl-eo,  -ere,  -evi,  -etum. 
Finish,     con-fic-io,    -ere,    -fec-i, 

-turn. 

Fix,  fig-o,  -ere,  fix-i,  -um. 
Flee,  fug-io,  -ere,  fugi,  fugitum. 
Flourish,  flor-eo,  -ere.  * 
Flow  past,  praeterflu-o,  -ere,  -xi, 

-ctum,  trans. 

Fly,  fug-io,  -ere,  fugi,  fugitum. 
Follow,  sequ-or,  -i,  secutus  sum. 
Foretell,    prae-dic-o,  -ere,   -dixi, 

-dictum. 
Forget,    oblivisc-or,    -i,    oblitus 

sum. 

Free,  liber-o,  -are. 
Furnish,  instru-o,  -ere, -xi, -ctum. 

Gain  )  possession     of,    pot-ior, 

Get    j      -iri. 

Get  ready,  exped-io,  -ire. 

Give,  d-o,  -are,  -edi,  -atum. 

Give  up,  ded-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum. 

Go,  eo,  ire,  ivi,  itum. 

Go  away,  ab-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum. 

Go    out,   e-gred-ior,   -i,   -gressus 

sum. 
Grant,  d-o,  -are,  -edi,  -atum. 


Grieve,  dol-eo,  -ere. 
Guard,  custod-io,  -ire. 

Halt,   con-sist-o,   -ere,    -stiti,   no 

sup. 
Hand    over,    trad-o,    -ere,    -idi, 

-itum. 

Happen,  accid-o,  -ere,  -i,  no  sup. 
Hate,  od-i,  -isse  (perf.,  with  pres. 

meaning). 

Have,  hab-eo,  -ere. 
Hear,  aud-io,  -ire. 
Hesitate,  dubit-o,  -are. 
Hoard,  cond-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itum. 
Hold,  hab-eo,  -ere. 
Hope,  sper-o,  -are. 

Imitate,  imit-or,  -ari. 
Impend,  impend-eo,  -ere. 
Important,  to  be,  see  Chap.  VI, 

Sec.  2. 
Impose  on,  im-pon-o,  -ere,  -pos- 

ui,  -itum. 
Indulge,     indul-geo,    -gere,     -si, 

-turn. 
Inflict    on,    in-fer-o,    -re,    -tuli, 

illatum. 

Injure,  noc-eo,  -ere. 
Injurious,  to  be,  ob-sum,  -esse, 

-fui,  no  sup. 
Insult,  insult-o,  -are  (lit.  to  leap 

on\ 
Invade,    in-vad-o,     -ere,     -vas-i, 

-um. 

Judge,  judic-o,  -are. 

Keep,  ten-eo,  -ere,  -ui,  -turn. 
Keep  off,  arc-eo,  -ere. 
Kill,  inter-fic-io,  -ere,  -fec-i,  -turn. 
Know,  sc-io,  -ire. 

Lay  waste,  vast-o,  -are. 

Lead,  duc-o,  -ere,  duxi,  ductum. 

Learn,    disc-o,    -ere,    didici,    no 

sup. 
Leave,     re-linqu-o,    -ere,    -liqui, 

-lictum. 


TO  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX.       141 


Lessen,  minu-o,  -ere,  -i,  minutum. 
Lie  (=tell  a  lie),  ment-ior,  -iri. 
Lie  beneath.,  subjac-eo,  -ere. 
Lie  between,  interjac-eo,  -ere. 
Live,  viv-o,  -ere,  vixi,  victum. 
Load,  cumul-o,  -are. 
Lose,  a-mitt-o,  -ere,  -mis-i,  -sum. 
Love,  am-o,  -are. 

Make,  fac-io,  -ere,  feci,  factum. 
Marry  (if  a  man  is  the  subject), 

duc-o,  -ere,  duxi,  ductum. 
Marry  (if  a  woman  is  the  subject), 

nub-o,    -ere,    nup-si,    -turn,    see 

Chap  iv,  Sec.  3. 
Matter,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  2. 
Mourn,  lug-eo,  -ere,  luxi,  luctum. 

Need,  eg-eo,  -ere. 
Neglect,     neg-lig-o,    -ere,    -lexi, 
-lectum. 

Obey,  par-eo,  -ere. 
Order,  imper-o,  -are. 
Overwhelm,     obru-o,     -ere,     -i, 
-turn. 

Paint,  ping-o,  -ere,  pinxi,  pictum. 
Pardon,  igno-sco,  -scere,  -vi,  -turn. 
Pay,  solv-o,  -ere,  -i,  solutum. 
Pay  attention,  operam  d-o,  -are, 

-edi,  -atum. 

Perceive,  sent-io,  -ire,  sens-i,  -um. 
Perform    (a   duty),   fung-or,   -i, 

functus  sum. 

Perish,  per-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum. 
Pitch  (a  camp),  pon-o,  -ere,  pos- 

ui,  -itum. 

Pity,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  5. 
Place,  pon-o,  -ere,  pos-ui,  -itum. 
Place    before,   ante-pon-o,   -ere, 

-pos-ui,  -itum. 
Place  on,  im-pon-o,  -ere,  -pos-ui, 

-itum. 
Place    round,    circumd-o,    -are, 

-edi,  -atum. 
Place     under,     sub-jic-io      -ere, 

-jec-i,  -turn. 


Play,  lud-o,  -ere,  lus-i,  -um. 

Please,  plac-eo,  -ere. 

Praise,  laud-o,  -are. 

Predict,    prae-dic-o,  ^-ere,    -dixi, 

-dictum. 

Prefer,  mal-o,  -le,  -ui,  no  sup. 
Preserve,  serv-o,  -are. 
Preside    over,   prae-sum,    -esse, 

-fui. 

Pretend,  simul-o,  -are. 
Prize,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  i. 
Produce,  fer-o,  -re,  tuli,  latum. 
Promise,  pollic-eor,  -eri. 
Provide,   pro-vid-eo,  -ere,  -vldi, 

-visum. 
Provoke,     lacess-o,     -ere,     -ivi, 

-itum. 

Punish,  pun-io,  -ire. 
Pursue,  sequ-or,  -i,  secutus  sum. 

Head,  leg-o,  -ere,  legi,  lectum. 

Recall,  revoc-o,  -are. 

Receive,    ac-cip-io,   -ere,   -cep-i, 

-turn. 

Reckon,  numer-o,  -are. 
Reconnoitre,  explor-o,  -are. 
Recover,    re-cip-io,   -ere,   -cep-i, 

-turn. 

Refuse,  neg-o,  -are. 
Reign,  regn-o,  -are. 
Rejoice,  gaud-eo,  -ere,  gavisus 

sum. 

Release,  solv-o,  -ere,  -i,  solutum. 
Remain,  man-eo,  -ere,  -si,  -sum. 
Remember,    reminisc-or,   -i,    no 

perf. ;    memin-i,  -isse,   no   sup. 

(perf.  with  pres.  meaning). 
Remind,  admon-eo,  -ere. 
Repent,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec.  5. 
Report,  nunci-o,  -are. 
Resign,  see  Chap,  v,  Sec.  7. 
Resist,   re-sist-o,   -ere,   -stiti,   no 

sup. 

Return,  red-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itum. 
Rob,  spoli-o,  -are. 
Rouse,  excit-o,  -are. 
Rout,  fund-o,  -ere,  fudi,  fusum. 
Run,  curr-o,  -ere,  cucurri,  cursum. 


VOCABULARIES 


Hun  down,  de-curr-o,  -ere,  -curri 
or  -cucurri,  -cursum. 

Satisfy,    satis-fac-io,    -ere,   -feci, 

-factum. 

Save,  serv-o,  -are. 
Say,  dic-o,  -ere,  dixi,  dictum. 
See,  vid-eo,  -ere,  vidi,  visum. 
Seek,  pet-o,  -ere,  -ivi,  -itum. 
Seem,  videor,   pass,   of  video,  I 

see. 
Select,  de-lig-o,  -ere,  -legi,  -lec- 

tum. 

Sell,  vend-o,  -ere,  -idi,  -itnm. 
Send,  mitt-o,  -ere,  mis-i,  -sum. 
Send  away,  di-mitt-o,  -ere,  -mls-i, 

-sum. 
Separate,    di-vid-o,    -ere,   -vis-i, 

-um. 

Serve,  serv-io,  -ire. 
Set  out,  proficisc-or,  -i,  profectus 

sum. 
Set  over,  prae-fic-io,  -ere,  -fec-i, 

-turn. 

Shout,  clam-o,  -are. 
Show,  monstr-o,  -are. 
Shut  out,  ex-clud-o,  -ere,  -clus-i, 

-um. 

Silent,  to  be,  sil-eo,  -ere. 
Sin,  pecc-o,  -are. 
Sit,  sed-eo,  -ere,  sedi,  sessum. 
Slay,  caed-o,  -ere,  cecidi,  caesum. 
Smite,  fer-io,  -ire,  no  perf.  or  sup. 
Spare,  parc-o,  -ere,  peperci,  par- 
sum. 

Speak,  loqu-or,  -i,  locutus  sum. 
Spend,      consum-o,     -ere,     -psi, 

-ptum. 

Spoil,  spoli-o,  -are. 
Stand,  st-o,  -are,  -eti,  -atum. 
Start,    proficisc-or,   -i,   profectus 

sum. 

Stay,  commor-or,  -ari. 
Storm,  expugn-o,  -are. 
Strike,  per-cut-io,  -ere,  -cuss-i, 

-um. 
Succour,     succur-ro,     -rere,    -ri, 

-sum. 


Suffer,  pat-ior,  -i,  passus  sum. 

Sup,  caen-o,  -are. 

Surprise,  op-prim-o,  -ere,  -press-i, 

-um. 
Surrender,    trans.,    ded-o,    -ere, 

-idi,  -itum. 

Suspect,  suspic-or,  -ari. 
Swear,  jur-o,  -are. 

Take,  cap-io,  -ere,  cepi,  captum. 
Take  away  from,  ad-im-o,  -ere, 

-emi,  -emptum. 
Taste,  gust-o,  -are. 
Teach,  doc-eo,  -ere,  -ui,  -turn. 
Tear  from,    ab-rip-io,   -ere,   -ui, 

-reptum. 

Tell,  dic-o,  -ere,  dixi,  dictum. 
Think,    put-o,   -are ;    reor,   reri, 

ratus  sum. 

Threaten,  min-or,  -ari. 
Throw  down,  de-jic-io,-ere,  -jec-i, 

-turn. 
Throw  round,  circum-jic-io,  -ere, 

-jec-i,  -turn. 

Touch,  tang-o,  -ere,  tetigi,  tactum. 
Trouble,  vex-o,  -are. 
Trust,  con-fid-o,  -ere,  -fisus  sum. 
Turn,  intr.,  vert-or,  -i,  versus  sum. 

Undertake,  sus-cip-io,-ere,  -cep-i, 

-turn. 
Unwilling,  to  be,  nol-o,  -le,  -ui, 

no  sup. 
Use?  ut-or,  -i,  usus  sum. 

Visit,  vis-o,  -ere,  -i,  -um. 

"Walk,  ambul-o,  -are. 

"Want     of,     to    be     in,    eg-eo, 

-ere. 
"Wanting,  to  be,  de-sum,  -esse, 

-fui. 

"Waste,  to  lay,  vast-o,  -are. 
"Weary    of,    to     be,    see  Chap. 

VI,  Sec.  5. 

"Weep  over,  illacrim-o,  -are. 
"Willing,  to  be,  volo,  velle,  volui, 

no  sup. 


TO  INTRODUCTION  TO  LATIN  SYNTAX.       143 

"Win,  par-io,  -ere,  peperi,  partum.  "Wound,  vulner-o,  -are. 

"Wish,  volo,  velle,  volui,  no  sup.  "Write,  scrib-o,  -ere,  scrip-si,  -turn. 

Without,  to  be,  car-eo,  -ere. 

"Wont,tobe,sol-eo,-ere,-itus  sum.  Yield,  ced-o,  -ere,  cess-i,  -um. 


4.  ADVERBS. 


About  (  =  nearly),  circiter. 

Afterwards,  postea. 

Almost,  fere. 

Alone,  tantum. 

Already,  jam. 

Also,  etiam. 

Always,  semper. 

At  least,  certe. 

At   once  (  =  at  the  same   time), 

simul. 
Away,  to  oarry,  go,  send,  take, 

see  Vocabulary  of  Verbs. 


Less,  minus. 

Little,  a  (qualifying  a  comp.  or 

superl.),  see  Chap,  v,  Sec.  2. 
Long,  diu. 

Much,  multum. 

Much    (qualifying    a    comp.     or 
superl.),  see  Chap,  v,  Sec.  2. 


Never,  nunquam. 

No  (qualifying  a  comp.),  see  Chap. 

v,  Sec.  2. 
Not,  non. 
Back,  to  drive,  see  Vocabulary       Not  yet,  nondum. 

of  Verbs.  Now,  mine. 

Before,  antea. 

Off,  to  keep,  see  Vocabulary  of 

Verbs. 

Often,  saepe. 
Once,   at  (  =  at  the  samo  time), 

simul. 

Only,  solum. 
Out,  to  cry,  to  go,  see  Vocabulary 


By  no  means,  nequaquam. 

Down,  to  run,  to  throw,  see  Vo- 
cabulary of  Verbs. 


Entirely,  omnino. 

Equally,  pariter. 

Even,  etiam. 

Ever  (in  a  negative  sentence),  un- 

quam. 
Everywhere,  ubique. 

Fiercely,  acriter. 
First,  primum. 
Formerly,  quondam. 

Here,  hie. 

Highly,  see  Chap,  vi,  Sec. 


However  (qualifying  an  adjective),       Soon,  mox. 


of  Verbs. 
Prosperously,  prospere. 

Rather,  magis. 

Rightly,  see  Chap,  v,  Sec.  i. 

Scarcely,  vix. 

So  (qualifying  an  adjective),  tarn. 
So  great  )  see  Vocabulary  of  Ad- 
So  many  \  jectives. 


quamvis. 
Immediately,  statim. 


Still,  adhuc. 
Stubbornly,  pertinaciter. 
Suddenly,  subito. 


Justly,  jure  (lit.  with  right),  abl.       Then,  turn. 


of  jus. 


Thence,  inde. 


144  VOCABULARIES. 

There,  ibi.  Up,  to  climb,  to  give,  see  Voca- 

Too    (qualifying   an   adjective   or  bulary  of  Verbs. 

another  adverb),  nimium. 

Too  little     )        ~,        rr  c  "Well,  bene. 

Too  much   1  See  ChaP'VI> Sec'  3-         Wisely,  sapienter. 

"Wrongly,  see  Chap,  v,  Sec.  i. 

Unjustly,  injuria  (lit.  with  wrong).       Yet,  not,  nondum. 

5.  PBEPOSITIONS. 

About  (  =  concerning),  de.  Inside,  intra. 

After,  post.  Into,  in. 
Against,  adversus. 

At,  ad.  Near,  prope. 

Before  (  =in  front  of),  pro.  Qn  account  of,  propter. 

Before  (of  time),  ante.  On  behalf  of,  pro. 

Between,  inter.  Out  of,  ex. 

By  (  =  near),  ad. 

By  (depending  on  a  passive  verb,  To  (implying  motion,  or  =  as  far 

to  show  the   person   by  whom  as^  a(j 

something  is  done),  a  or  ab.  To  (not  implying  motion),  gene- 
For  (  =  in  defence  of),  pro.  rally  expressed  by  the  dative. 

From,  a  or  ab.  w'th 

)  £  WHbo^ne;  to ,  be  ^out, 
see  Vocabulary  of  Verbs  ;  with- 
in, in.  out  control  over,  see  Vocabu- 
In  the  midst  of,  inter.  lary  of  Adjectives. 

6.  CONJUNCTIONS. 

After,  postquam.  Neither  —  nor,  nee  —  nee. 

Because,  quod.  Or,  aut 

Before,  antequam. 

Both  —  and,  et  —  et.  Since,  quoniam. 

But'Sed'  Than,qnam. 

Either  —  or,  aut  —  aut.  That  ( =  in  order  that),  ut. 

Except,  nisi. 

Unless,  nisi. 
For,  nam. 

jf  sj  "When,  quum. 

"Where,  ubi. 
Lest,  ne.  "While,  dum. 

THE    END. 


July,  1888. 

C&e  Clarennon  Press, 
LIST  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS, 

PUBLISHED   FOR    THE    UNIVERSITY  BY 

HENRY    FBOWDE, 

AT   THE    OXFORD   UNIVERSITY   PRESS   WAREHOUSE, 
AMEN   CORNER,    LONDON. 


%*    All  Books  are  bound  in  Cloth,  unless  otherwise  described. 


LATIN. 

Allen.   An  Elementary  Latin  Grammar.    By  J.  BARROW  ALLEN,  M.A. 

Fifty-seventh  Thousand Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Allen.     Rudimenta  Latina.    By  the  same  Author.    Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2 s. 
Allen.     A  First  Latin  Exercise  Book.     By  the  same  Author.    Fourth 

Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  f>d. 

Allen.     A  Second  Latin  Exercise  Book.    By  the  same  Author. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*.  6d. 

\A  Key  to  First  and  Second  Latin  Exercise  Books  :  for  Teachers  only.} 
Jerram.      Anglice  Reddenda ;    or  Extracts,    Latin   and  Greek,  for 
Unseen  Translation.      By  C.  S.  JERRAM,  M.A.     Fourth  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Jerram.  Anglice  Reddenda.  SECOND  SERIES.    By  C.  S.  JERRAM, M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 

Jerram.  Reddenda  Minor  a  ;  or,  Easy  Passages,  Latin  and  Greek,  for 
Unseen  Translation.  For  the  use  of  Lower  Forms.  Composed  and  selected 

by  C.  S.  JERRAM,  M.A '  .        Extra  fcap.  8vo.  x*.  6d. 

Lee-Warner.     Hints  and  Helps  for  Latin  Elegiacs. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$.  &/. 
[A  Key  is  provided :  for  Teachers  only.} 

Lewis  and  Short.  A  Latin  Dictionary,  founded  on  Andrews'  Edition 
of  Freund's  Latin  Dictionary.  By  CHARLTON  T.  LEWIS,  Ph.D.,  and  CHARLES 
SHORT,  LL.D 4to.  255. 

Nnnns.    First  Latin  Reader.    By  T.  J.  NUNNS,  M.A.     Third  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  25. 

Fapillon.  A  Manual  of  Comparative  Philology  as  applied  to  the  Illustra- 
tion of  Greek  and  Latin  Inflections.  By  T.  L.  PAPILLON,  M.A.  Third  Edition. 

Crown  8vo.  6s. 

Ramsay.  Exercises  in  Latin  Prose  Composition.  With  Introduction, 
Notes,  and  Passages  of  graduated  difficulty  for  Translation  into  Latin.  By 
G.  G.  RAMSAY,  M.A.,  Professor  of  Humanity,  Glasgow.  Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d. 
Sargent.     Passages  for  Translation  into  Latin.     By  J.  Y.  SARGENT, 

M.A.     Seventh  Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

[A  Key  to -this  Edition  is  provided :  for  Teachers  only.} 

[1] 


2  CLARENDON  PRESS 

Caesar.  The  Commentaries  (for  Schools).  With  Notes  and  Maps. 
By  CHARLES  E.  MOBERLY,  M.A. 

The  Gallic  War.    Second  Edition    ....      Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d. 
The  Gallic  War.     Books  I,  II.    Just  ready. 

The  Civil  War Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*.  6 d. 

The  Civil  War.    Book  I.    Second  Edition.     .        .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Catulli    Veronensis     Carmina    Selecta,    secundum     recognitionem 

ROBINSON  ELLIS,  A.  M.    .  ....      Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*.  6d. 

Cicero.  Selection  of  interesting  and  descriptive  passages.  With  Notes. 
By  HENRY  WALFORD,  M.A.  In  three  Parts.  Third  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4$.  6d. 

Part  I.      Anecdotes  front  Grecian  and  Roman  History.        .        limp,  is.  6d. 
Part  II.     Omens  and  Dreams ;  Beauties  of  Nature.     .        .        limp,  is.  6d. 

Part  III.  Rome's  Rule  of  her  Provinces limp,  is.  f>d. 

Cicero.     De  Senectute.     With  Introduction  and  Notes.     By  LEONARD 

HUXLEY,  B.  A.    In  one  or  two  Parts      ....         Extra  fcap.  8 vo.  zs. 

Cicero.   Pro  Cluentio.    With  Introduction  and  Notes.   By  W.  RAMSAY, 

M.A.    Edited  by  G.  G.  RAMSAY,  M.A.   Second  Edition.    Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*.  6d. 

Cicero.     Selected  Letters  (for  Schools).     With   Notes.     By  the  late 

C.  E.  PRICHARD,  M.A.,  and  E.  R.  BERNARD,  M.A.    Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 

Cicero.  Select  Orations  (for  Schools).  First  Action  against  Verres ; 
Oration  concerning  the- command  of  Gnaeus  Pompeius;  Oration  on  beJialf  of 
Archias ;  Ninth  Philippic  Oration.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  J.  R. 

KING,  M.A.     Second  Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Cicero.  In  Q.  Caecilium  Divinatio  and  In  C.  Verrem  Actio  Prima. 
With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  J.  R.  KING,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  limp,  is.  6d. 

Cicero.    Speeches  against  Catilina.    With  Introduction  and  Notes.    By 

E.  A.  UPCOTT,  M.A.    In  one  or  two  Parts.        .        .    '    Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Cicero.    Philippic  Orations.    With  Notes,  &c.  by  J.  R.  KING,  M.A. 

Second  Edition 8vo.  IQS.  6J. 

Cicero.     Select  Letters.    With  English  Introductions,  Notes,  and  Ap- 
pendices.    By  ALBERT  WATSON,  M.A.     Third  Edition.      .      .      .      8vo.  18*. 
Cicero.     Select  Letters.    Text.     By  the  same  Editor.     Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*. 

Cornelius    ITepos.     With   Notes.      By   OSCAR    BROWNING,   M.A. 

Third  Edition.     Revised  by  W.  R.  INGE,  M.A.    .         .        Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3:. 

Horace.      With    a   Commentary.      Volume   I.      The    Odes,    Carmen 

Seculare,  and  Epodes.     By   EDWARD  C.  WICKHAM,  M.A.,  Head   Master  of 

Wellington  College.    New  Edition.    In  one  or  two  Parts.     Extra  fcap.  8vo.  6s. 

Horace.     Selected  Odes.    With  Notes  for  the  use  of  a  Fifth  Form.     By 

E.  C.  WICKHAM,  M.A.     In  one  or  two  Parts.        .        .        Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Juvenal.     XIII  Satires.     Edited,  with  Introduction,  Notes,  etc.,  by 

C.  H.  PEARSON,  M.A.,  and  H.  A.  STRONG,  M.A.    .        .        .        Crown  8vo.  6s. 

Or  separately,  Text  and  Introduction,  35. ;  Notes,  3*.  6d. 

tivy.  Selections  (for  Schools).  With  Notes  and  Maps.  By  H.  LEE- 
WARNER,  M.A •  •  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo 

Part  I.       The  Caudine  Disaster.  t  limp,  is.  6d. 

Part  II.    HannibaVs  Campaign  in  Italy limp,  is.  dd. 

Part  III.  The  Macedonian  War. limp,  is.  6d. 


LIS7  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 


Iiivy.  Book  I.  With  Introduction,  Historical  Examination,  and  Notes. 
By  J.  R.  SEELEY  M.A.  Second  Edition 8vo.  6*. 

Livy.  Books  V—VII.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  A.  R.CLUER, 
B.A.  Second  Edition.  Revised  by  P.  E.  MATHESON,  M.A.  In  one  or  two 
parts.  .  .  .  .  ' Extra  fcap.  8vo.  5$. 

tivy.'  Books  XXI— XXIII.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By 
M.  T.  TATHAM,  M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*.  6d. 

Livy.  Book  XXII.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  the  same 
Editor.  Just  ready. 

Ovid.  Selections  (for  the  use  of  Schools).  With  Introductions  and 
Notes,  and  an  Appendix  on  the  Roman  Calendar.  By  W.  RAMSAY,  M.A. 
Edited  by  G.  G.  RAMSAY,  M.A.  Third  Edition.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  55.  64. 

Ovid.     Tristia,  Book  I.    Edited  by  S.  G.  OWEN,  B.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  &d. 

Per  sins.  The  Satires.  With  Translation  and  Commentary  by 
J.  CONINGTON,  M.A.,  edited  by  H.  NETTLESHIP,  M.A.  Second  Edition. 

8vo.  75.  6d. 

Plantns.  Captivi.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  W.  M.  LINDSAY, 
M.A.  In  one  or  two  Parts.  \  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2s.  6d. 

Plantns.  Trinummus.  With  Notes  and  Introductions.  By  C.  E. 
FREEMAN,  M.A.  and  A.  SLOMAN,  M.A.  ....  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 

Pliny.  Selected  Letters  (for  Schools).  With  Notes.  By  the  late 
C.  E.  PRICHARD,  M.A.,  and  E.  R.  BERNARD,  M.A.  New  Edition.  In  one  or 
two  Parts. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3^. 

Sallnst.  Bellum  Catilinarium  and  fugurthinum.  With  Introduc- 
tion and  Notes,  by  W.  W.  CAPES,  M.A.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6<£. 

Tacitns.  The  Annals.  Books  I — IV.  Edited,  with  Introduction  and 
Notes  for  the  use  of  Schools  and  Junior  Students,  by  H.  FURNEAUX,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  55. 

Tacitns.     The  Annals.     Book  I.     By  the  same  Editor. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  limp,  vs. 

Terence.  Adelphi.  With  Notes  and  Introductions.  By  A.  SLOMAN, 
M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 

Terence.  Andria.  With  Notes  and  Introductions.  By  C.  E.  FREEMAN, 
M.A.,  and  A.  SLOMAN,  M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 

Terence.  Phormio.  With  Notes  and  Introductions.  By  A:  SLOMAN, 
M.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 

Tibnllns  and  Propertins.  Edited,  with  Introduction  and  Notes,  by 
G.  G.  RAMSAY,  M.A.  In  one  or  two  Parts.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  6$. 

Virgil.     With    Introduction  and  Notes,  by  T.  L.  PAPILLON,  M.A. 

In  Two  Volumes.    .        .        .          Crown  8vo.  ios.  6d. ;  Text  separately,  4$.  (>d. 

Virgil.  Bucolics.  With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  C.  S.  JERRAM,  M.A. 
In  one  or  two  Parts.    Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d, 

Virgil.  Aeneidl.  With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  C.  S.  JERRAM,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  limp,  is.  6d, 

Virgil.  Aeneid  IX.  Edited  with  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  A.  E. 
HAIGH,  M.A.  •  .  .  .  Extra  fcap  8vo.  limp  is.  6d.  In  two  Parts,  zs. 


CLARENDON  PRESS 


GREEK. 

Chandler.      The   Elements    of   Greek    Accentuation    (for    Schools). 

By  H.  W.  CHANDLER,  M.A.  Second  Edition.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2$.  6d. 
Liddell  and  Scott.  A  Greek-English  Lexicon,  by  HENRY  GEORGE 

LIDDELL,  D.D.,  and  ROBERT  SCOTT,  D.D.  Seventh  Edition.  .  410.  365. 
Liddell  and  Scott.  A  Greek-English  Lexicon,  abridged  from  LIDDELL 

and  SCOTT'S  410.  edition,  chiefly  for  the  use  of  Schools.  Twenty-first  Edition. 

Square  12010.  js.  6d. 
Veitch.  Greek  Verbs,  Irregular  and  Defective :  their  forms,  meaning, 

and  quantity  ;  embracing  all  the  Tenses  used  by  Greek  writers,  with  references 

to  the  passages  in  which  they  are  found.  By  W.  VEITCH,  LL.D.  Fourth  Edition. 

Crown  8vo.  10*.  6d. 
Wordsworth.  Graecae  Grammaticae  Rudimenta  in  usum  Scholarum. 

Auctore  CAROLO  WORDSWORTH,  D.CL.     Nineteenth  Edition.       .        i2mo.  45. 

Wordsworth.  A  Greek  Primer,  for  the  use  of  beginners  in  that 
Language.  By  the  Right  Rev.  CHARLES  WORDSWORTH,  D.CL.,  Bishop  of 
St.  Andrew's.  Seventh  Edition.  ....  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  i*.  6d. 

Wright.  The  Golden  Treasury  of  Ancient  Greek  Poetry ;  being  a 
Collection  of  the  finest  passages  in  the  Greek  Classic  Poets,  with  Introductory 
Notices  and  Notes.  By  R.  S.  WRIGHT,  M.A. .  .  New  edition  in  the  Press. 

Wright  and  Shadwell.  A  Golden  Treasury  of  Greek  Prose ;  being 
a  Collection  of  the  finest  passages  in  the  principal  Greek  Prose  Writers,  with 
Introductory  Notices  and  Notes.  By  R.  S.  WRIGHT,  M.A.,  and  J.  E.  L.  SHAD- 
WELL,  M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*.  6J. 


A  SERIES  OF  GRADUATED  READERS.— 

Easy  Greek  Reader.    By  EVELYN  ABBOTT,  M.A.    In  one  or  two 

Parts Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 

First  Greek  Reader.  By  W.  G.  RUSHBROOKE;,  M.L.,  Second 
Classical  Master  at  the  City  of  London  School.  Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2*.  6d. 
Second  Greek  Reader.  By  A.  M.  BELL,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  (>d. 

Fourth  Greek  Reader  ;  being  Specimens  of  Greek  Dialects.  With 
Introductions  and  Notes.  By  W.  W.  MERRY,  D.D.,  Rector  of  Lincoln 
College Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  dd. 

Fifth  Greek  Reader.  Selections  from  Greek  Epic  and  Dramatic 
Poetry,  with  Introductions  and  Notes.  By  EVELYN  ABBOTT,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d. 

THE  GREEK  TESTAMENT.— 

Evangelia  Sacra  Graece.        .         .         .        Fcap.  8vo.  limp,  is.  6d. 

The  Greek  Testament,  with  the  Readings  adopted  by  the  Revisers  of 

the  Authorised  Version. 

Fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d.  ;  or  on  writing  paper,  with  wide  margin,  155. 

XTovum  Testamentum  Graece  juxta  Exemplar  Millianum. 

iSmo.  zs.  6d. ;  or  on  writing  paper,  with  large  margin,  gs. 


LIST  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 


STovum  Testamentum  Graece.  Accedunt  parallela  S.  Scripturae 
loca,  necnon  vetus  capitulorum  notatio  et  canones  Eusebii.  Edidit  CAROLUS 
LLOYD,  S.T.P.R.,  necnon  Episcopus  Oxoniensis. 

i8mo.  35. ;  or  on  writing  paper,  with  large  margin,  10$.  f>d. 

A  Greek  Testament  Primer.  An  Easy  Grammar  and  Reading 
Book  for  the  use  of  Students  beginning  Greek.  By  REV.  E.  MILLER,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  y.  6d. 

Outlines  of  Textual  Criticism  applied  to  the  New  Testament. 

By  C  E.  HAMMOND,  M.A.     Fourth  Edition.      .        .      Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d. 


Aeschylus.   Agamemnon.    With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  ARTHUR 

SIDGWICK,  M.A.  Third  Edition.  In  one  or  two  Parts  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 
Aeschylus.  Choephoroi.  With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  the  same 

Editor Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 

Aeschylus.  Eumenides.  With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  the  same 

Editor.  In  one  or  two  Parts. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 

Aeschylus.  Prometheus  Bound.  With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by 

A.  O.  PRICKARD,  M.A.  Second  Edition.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  25. 
Aristophanes.  The  Clouds.  With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  W.  W. 

MERRY,  D.D.  Second  Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Aristophanes.  The  Acharnians.  By  the  same  Editor.  Third 

Edition.  In  one  or  two  Parts Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 

Aristophanes.  The  Frogs.  By  the  same  Editor.  New  Edition.  In 

one  or  two  Parts Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 

Aristophanes.  The  Knights.  By  the  same  Editor.  In  one  or  two 

Parts. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 

Cebes.  Tabula.  With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  C.  S.  JERRAM,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Demosthenes.  Orations  against  Philip.  With  Introduction  and  Notes. 
By  EVELYN  ABBOTT,  M.A.,  and  P.  E.  MATHESON,  M.A.,  Vol.  I.  Philippic  I 
and  Olynthiacs  I — ///.  In  one  or  two  Parts.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35. 

Euripides.  Alcestis.  By  C.  S.  JERRAM,  M.A.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2s.  6ct. 
Euripides.  Helena.  By  the  same  Editor.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3-f. 
Euripides.  Heradeidae.  By  the  same  Editor.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3^. 
Euripides.  Iphigenia  in  Tauris.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  the 

same  Editor Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35. 

Euripides.  Medea.  With  Introduction,  Notes  and  Appendices.  By 

C.  B.  HEBERDEN,  M.A.    In  one  or  two  Parts.         .        .        Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2*. 

Herodotus.     Book  IX.     Edited  with  Notes,  by  EVELYN  ABBOTT, 

M.A.    In  one  or  two  Parts Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 

Herodotus.      Selections.    Edited,  with  Introduction,  Notes,  and  a  Map, 

by  W.  W.  MERRY,  D.D Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2$.  6d. 

Homer.      Iliad,    Books   I-XIL       With    an    Introduction,    a    brief 

Homeric  Grammar,  and  Notes.  By  D.  B.  MONRO,  M.A.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  6s. 
Homer.  Iliad,  Book  I.  By  the  same  Editor.  Third  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Homer.  Iliad,  Books  VI  and  XXI.  With  Notes,  &c.  By  HERBERT 
HAILSTONE,  M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  is.  6d.  each. 


CLARENDON  PRESS 


Homer.  Odyssey,  Books  I-XII.  By  W.  W.  MERRY,  D.D.  New 
Edition.  In  one  or  two  Parts Extra  fcap.  8vo.  5$. 

Homer.  Odyssey,  Books  XIII-XXIV.  By  the  same  Editor.  Second 
Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  5*. 

Homer.    Odyssey,  Books  I  and  II.    By  the  same  Editor. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  each  is.  6d. 

Lucian.      Vera  Historia.    By  C.  S.  JERRAM,  M.A.      Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  is.  6d. 

Plato.  The  Apology.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  ST.  GEORGE 
STOCK,  M.A.  In  one  or  two  Parts Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Plato.  Meno.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  ST.  GEORGE  STOCK, 
M.A.  In  one  or  two  Parts. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Sophocles.  (For  the  use  of  Schools.)  Edited  with  Introductions  and 
English  Notes  by  LEWIS  CAMPBELL,  M.A.,  and  EVELYN  ABBOTT,  M.A.  New 

and  Revised  Edition.      2  Vols Extra  fcap.  8vo.  ios.  6d. 

Sold  separately,  Vol.  I.  Text,  4*.  6d.    Vol.  II.  Notes,  6*. 

*>  Also  in  single  Plays.    Extra  fcap.  Bvo.  limp, 
Oedipus  Tyrannus,    Philoctetes.    New  and  Revised  Edition,  zs.  each. 

Oedipus  Coloneus,    Antigone,  is.  gd.  each. 
Ajax,  Electra,  Trachiniae.  25.  each. 

Sophocles.  Oedipus  Rex:  Dindorfs  Text,  with  Notes  by  W.  BASIL 
JONES,  D.D.,  Lord  Bishop  of  S.  David's.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  limp,  is.  6d. 

Theocritus.    Edited,   with  Notes,  by  H.  KYNASTON,   D.D.   (late 

SNOW).    Fourth  Edition.  »        »        .        .        .        Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*.  6d. 

Zenophon.  Easy  Selections  (for  Junior  Classes).  With  a  Vocabulary, 
Notes,  and  Map.  By  J.  S.  PHILLPOTTS,  B.C.L.,  Head  Master  of  Bedford 
School,  and  C.  S.  JERRAM,  M.A,  Third  Edition.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d. 

Zenophon.  Selections  (for  Schools).  With  Notes  and  Maps.  By 
J.  S.  PHILLPOTTS,  B.C.L.  Fourth  Edition.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*.  6d. 

Xenophon.  Anabasis,  Book  I.  With  Notes  and  Map.  By  J.  MARSHALL, 

M.A.,  Rector  of  the  High  School,  Edinburgh.   .       .        Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Xenophon.  Anabasis,  Book  II.  With  Notes  and  Map.  By  C.  S. 
JERRAM,  M.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Xenophon.     Anabasis,  Book  III.    By  J.  MARSHALL,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Xenophon.  Cyropaedia,  Book  I.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By 
C.  BIGG,  D.D.  i  j  i  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Xenophon.  Cyropaedia,  Books  IV,  V.  With  Introduction  and  Notes, 
by  C.  BIGG,  D.D Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Xenophon.  Helknica,  Books  I,  II.  With  Introduction  and  Notes. 
By  G.  E.  UNDERHILL,  M.A .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$. 


LIST  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 


EARLY  AND  MIDDLE  ENGLISH,  &c. 

May-hew  and  Skeat.  A  Concise  Dictionary  of  Middle  English.  By 
A.  L.  MAYHEW,  M.A.,  and  W.  W.  SKEAT,  Litt.  D.  .  .  Crown  8vo.  7s.  (,d. 

Skeat.  A  Concise  Etymological  Dictionary  of  the  English  Language. 
By  W.  W.  SKEAT,  Litt.  D.  Third  Edition.  .  .  .  Crown  8vo.  55.  6d. 

Tancock.  An  Elementary  English  Grammar  and  Exercise  Book. 
By  O.  W.  TANCOCK,  M.A.,  Head  Master  of  King  Edward  VI's  School,  Norwich. 
Second  Edition.  .  '  .  .  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  is.  6d. 

Tancock.  An  English  Grammar  and  Reading  Book,  for  Lower 
Forms  in  Classical  Schools.  By  O.  W.  TANCOCK,  M.A.  Fourth  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$.  6d. 

Skeat.  The  Principles  of  English  Etymology.  First  Series.  By 
W.  W.  SKEAT,  Litt.  D Crown  Svo.  gs. 

Barle.  The  Philology  of  the  English  Tongue.  By  J.  EARLE,  M.A., 
Professor  of  Anglo-Saxon.  Fourth  Edition.  -.  .  Extra  fcap.  Svo.  ys.  6d. 

Earle.  A  Book  for  the  Beginner  in  Anglo-Saxon.  By  the  same  Author. 
Third  Edition Extra  fcap.  Svo.  zs.  6d. 

Sweet.  An  Anglo-Saxon  Primer,  with  Grammar,  Notes,  and  Glossary. 
By  HENRY  SWEET,  M.A.  Third  Edition.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  Svo.  zs.  6d. 

Sweet.  An  Anglo-Saxon  Reader.  In  Prose  and  Verse.  With  Gram- 
matical Introduction,  Notes,  and  Glossary.  By  the  same  Author.  Fourth 
Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged.  ....  Extra  fcap.  Svo.  8s.  6d. 

Sweet.     A  Second  Anglo-Saxon  Reader.     By  the  same  Author. 

Extra  fcap.  Svo.  45.  dd. 
Sweet.     Anglo-Saxon  Reading  Primers. 

I.    Selected  Homilies  of  JElfric.  Extra  fcap.  Svo.  stiff  covers,  is.  6d. 

II.    Extracts  from  Alfred's  Orosius.  Extra  fcap.  Svo.  stiff  covers,  is.  6d. 

Sweet,  first  Middle  English  Primer,  with  Grammar  and  Glossary. 
By  the  same  Author. Extra  fcap.  Svo.  zs. 

Sweet.  Second  Middle  English  Primer.  Extracts  from  Chaucer,  with 
Grammar  and  Glossary.  By  the  same  Author.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  Svo.  zs. 

Morris  and  Skeat.  Specimens  of  Early  English.  A  New  and  Re- 
vised Edition.  With  Introduction,  Notes,  and  Glossarial  Index. 

Part  I.  From  Old  English  Homilies  to  King  Horn  (A.D.  1150  to  A.D.  1300). 
By  R.  MORRIS,  LL,D.     Second  Edition        .        .        Extra  fcap.  Svo.  os. 
Part  11.   From  Robert  of  Gloucester  to  Gower  (A.D.  I2Q8  to  A.D.  1393).    By  R. 
MORRIS,  LL.D.,  and  W.  W.  SKEAT,  Litt.  D.     Third  Edition     ~ 

Extra  fcap.  Svo.  75.  ftd. 

Skeat.  Specimens  of  English  Literature,  from  the  '  Ploughmans 
Crede*  to  the  '  Shepheardes  Calender'  (A.D.  1394  to  A.D.  1579).  With  Intro- 
duction, Notes,  and  Glossarial  Index.  By  W.  W.  SKEAT,  Litt.  D.  Fourth  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  Svo.  js.  f>d. 

Typical  Selections  from  the  best  English  Writers,  with  Intro- 
ductory Notices.  Second  Edition.  In  Two  Volumes.  Vol.  I.  Latimer  to 
Berkeley.  Vol.  II.  Pope  to  Macaulay.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  Svo.  3.1.  6d.  each 


CLARENDON  PRESS 


A  SERIES  OF  ENGLISH  CLASSICS. 

Gangland.  The  Vision  of  William  concerning  Piers  the  Plowman, 
by  WILLIAM  LANGLAND.  Edited  by  W.  W.  SKEAT,  Litt.  D.  Fourth  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d. 

Chaucer.  I.  The  Prologue  to  the  Canterbury  Tales ;  The  Knightes 
Tale;  The  Nonne  Prestes  Tale.  Edited  by  R.  MORRIS,  LL.D.  Fifty. first 
Thousand. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Chaucer.  II.  The  Prioresses  Tale  ;  Sir  Thopas  ;  The  Monkes  7 ale  ; 
TheClerkes  Tale;  The  Squieres  Tale,  $c.  Edited  by  W.W.  SKEAT,  Litt.D. 
Third  Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d. 

Chaucer.  III.  The  Tale  of  the  Man  of  Lawe  ;  The  Pardoneres  Tale; 
The  Second  Nonnes  Tale;  The  Chanouns,  Yemannes  Tale.  By  the  same 
Editor.  New  Edition,  Revised Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*.  6d. 

Gamelyn,  The  Tale  of.     Edited  by  W.  W.  SKEAT,  Litt.  D. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff  covers,  is.  6d. 

Minot.  The  Poems  of  Laurence  Minot.  Edited,  with  Introduction 
and  Notes,  by  JOSEPH  HALL,  M.A.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4$.  6d. 

Wycliffe.  The  New  Testament  in  English,  according  to  the  Version 
by  JOHN  WYCLIFFE,  about  A.D.  1380,  and  Revised  by  JOHN  PURVEY,  about 
A.D.  1388.  With  Introduction  and  Glossary  by  W.  W.  SKEAT,  Litt.  D. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  6s. 

Wycliffe.  The  Books  of  Job,  Psalms,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes,  and  the 
Song  of  Solomon:  according  to  the  Wycliffite  Version  made  by  NICHOLAS  DK 
HEREFORD,  about  A.D.  1381,  and  Revised  by  JOHN  PURVEY,  about  A.D.  1388. 
With  Introduction  and  Glossary  by  W.W.  SKEAT,  Litt.D.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d. 

Spenser.  The  Faery  Queene.  Books  I  and  II.  Edited  by  G.  W. 
KITCHIN,  D.D. 

Book  I.     Tenth  Edition.  ....         Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Book  II.  Sixth  Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Hooker.    Ecclesiastical  Polity,  Book  I.     Edited  by  R.  W.  CHURCH, 

M.A.,  Dean  of  St.  Paul's.    Second  Edition.        .        .        .     Extra  fcap.  8 vo.  zs. 

Marlowe  and  Greene. — MARLOWE'S  Tragical  History  of  Dr.  Fausfus, 

and    GREENE'S    Honourable  History  of  Friar  Bacon    and  Friar  Bungay. 

Edited  by  A.  W.  WARD,  M.A.     New  Edition.    .        .        Extra  fcap.  8vo.  6s.  6d. 

Marlowe.  Edward  II.  Edited  by  O.  W.  TANCOCK,  M.A.  Second 
Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  Paper  covers,  zs.  cloth,  y. 

Shakespeare.     Select  Plays.     Edited  by  W.  G.  CLARK,  M.A.,  and 
W.  ALOIS  WRIGHT,  M.A.        .....   Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff  covers. 

The  Merchant  of  Venice,    is.  Macoeth.     is.  6d. 

Richard  the  Second,    is.  6d.  Hamlet,    zs. 

Edited  by  W.  ALDIS  WRIGHT,  M.A. 

The  Tempest,     is.  6d.  Coriolanus.     zs.  6d. 

As  You  Like  It.     is.  6d.  Richard  the  Third,    zs.  6d. 

A  Midsummer  Night's  Dream,  is.  6d.      Henry  the  Fifth,    zs. 
Twelfth  Night.    is.6d.  King  John.     is.6d. 

Julius  Cxsar.     zs.  King  Lear,    is.  6d. 


LIST  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 


Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatic  Artist ;  a  popular  Illustration  of  the 
Principles  of  Scientific  Criticism.  By  R.  G.  MOULTON,  M.A.  Crown  8vo.  5*. 

Bacon.  Advancement  of  Learning.  Edited  by  W.  ALDIS  WRIGHT, 
M.A.  Third  Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*.  6rf. 

Milton.  I.  Areopagitica.  With  Introduction  and  Notes.  By  JOHN 
W.  HALES,  M.A.  Third  Edition Extra  f cap.  8 vo.  3*. 

Milton.    II.  Poems.    Edited  by  R.  C.  BROWNE,  M.A.    2  vols.   Fifth 

Edition.         .     Extra  fcap.  8vo.  6s.  6d.    Sold  separately,  Vol.  I.  45.,   Vol.  II.  3*. 

In  paper  covers  : — 
Lycidas,  ^d.        L'A  llegro,  -$d.        II  Penseroso,  ^d.        Cffmus,  f>d. 

Milton.  III.  Paradise  Lost.  Book  I.  Edited  with  Notes,  by  H.  C. 
BEECHING,  M.A.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  is.  6d.  In  'white  Parchment,  3$.  6d. 

Milton.  IV.  Samson  Agonistes.  Edited  with  Introduction  and  Notes 
by  JOHN  CHURTON  COLLINS.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff  covers,  is. 

Clarendon.  History  of  the  Rebellion.  Book  VI.  Edited  with 
Introduction  and  Notes  by  T.  ARNOLD,  M.A.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d. 

Bnnyan.  The  Pilgrim's  Progress,  Grace  Abounding,  Relation  of 
the  Imprisonment  of  Mr.  John  Bunyan.  Edited  by  E.  VENABLES,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  5$.     In  white  Parchment,  6s. 

Dryden.  Stanzas  on  the  Death  of  Oliver  Cromwell ;  Astr<za  Redux  ; 
Annus  Mirdbilis ,'  Absalom  and  Achitophel;  Religio  Laicil  The  Hind  and 
the  Panther.  Edited  by  W.  D.  CHRISTIE,  M.A:  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3$.  6d. 

Locke's  Conduct  of  the  Understanding.  Edited,  with  Introduction, 
Notes,  &c.  by  T.  FOWLER,  D.D,  Second  Edition.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2*. 

Addison.  Selections  from  Papers  in  the  '  Spectator?  With  Notes. 
By  T.  ARNOLD,  M.A.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d.  In  white  Parchment,  6s. 

Steele.  Selected  Essays  from  the  Tatter,  Spectator,  and  Guardian.  By 
AUSTIN  DOBSON.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  5$.  In  white  Parchment,  js.  6d. 

Berkeley.  Select  Works  of  Bishop  Berkeley,  with  an  Introduction  and 
Notes,  by  A.  C.  FRASER,  LL.D.  Third  Edition.  .  .  Crown  8vo.  7*.  6d. 

Pope.     I.  Essay  on  Man.    Edited  by  MARK  PATTISON,  B.D.    Sixth 

Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  is.  6d, 

Pope.   II.  Satires  and  Epistles.    By  the  same  Editor.    Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2*. 

Parnell.     The  Hermit. Paper  covers,  2d. 

Johnson.  I.  Rasselas.  Edited,  with  Introduction  and  Notes,  by 
G.  BIRKBECK  HILL,  D  .C.L.  Extra  fcap.Svo.  limp,  2s.  In  white  Parchment, y.ftd. 

Johnson.  II.  Rasselas;  Lives  of  Dryden  and  Pope.  Edited  by 
ALFRED  MILNES,  M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d. 

Lives  of  Pope  and  Dryden Stiff  covers,  2s.  6d. 

Johnson.  III.  Life  of  Milton.  Edited,  with  Notes,  etc.,  by  C.  H. 
FIRTH,  M.A.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff' covers,  is  €>d. ;  cloth,  zs.  6d. 

Johnson.  IV.  Vanity  of  Human  Wishes.  With  Notes,  by  E.  J. 
PAYNE,  M.A. Paper  covers,  +d. 


10  CLARENDON  PRESS 

Gray.    Selected  Poems.     Edited  by  EDMUND  GOSSE. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.    Stiff  covers,  is.  6d.    In  white  Parchment,  3*. 
Gray.    Elegy,  and  Ode  on  Eton  College.      .        .        Paper  covers,  2d. 

Goldsmith.    Selected  Poems.    Edited,  with  Introduction  and  Notes,  by 

AUSTIN  DOBSON Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d. 

In  white  Parchment,  45.  6d. 

Goldsmith.     The  Traveller.    Edited  by  G.  BIRKBECK  HILL,  D.C.L. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff  covers,  is. 
The  Deserted  Village Paper  covers,  id. 

Cowper.    I.  The  Didactic  Poems  of  1782,  with  Selections  from  the 
Minor  Pieces,  A.D.  1779-1783.    Edited  by  H.  T.  GRIFFITH,  B.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 

Cowper.     II.  The   Task,  with  Tirocinium,  and  Selections  from  the 
Minor  Poems,  A.D.  1784-1799.     By  the  same  Editor.     Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 

Burke.    I.    Thoughts  on  the  Present  Discontents;  the  two  Speeches 
on  America.    Edited  by  E.  J.  PAYNE,  M.A.     Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4$.  6d. 
Burke.     II.    Reflections   on   the  French  Revolution.     By  the  same 

Editor.     Second  Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  55. 

Burke.    III.    Four  Letters    on    the   Proposals  for  Peace  with    the 
Regicide  Directory  of  France.     By  the  same  Editor.     Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  5*. 

Keats.    Hyperion,  Book  I.    With  Notes,  by  W.  T.  ARNOLD,  B.A. 

Paper  covers,  ^d. 

Byron.   Childe  Harold.  With  Introduction  and  Notes,  by  H.  F.  TOZER, 
M.A.          ....        Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d.    In  white  Parchment,  55. 
Scott.      Lay  of  the  Last  Minstrel.     Edited  with  Preface  and  Notes  by 
W.  MINTO,  M.A.    With  Map. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff  covers,  zs.     In  Ornamental  Parchment,  y.  6d. 

Scott.    Lay  of  the  Last  Minstrel.    Introduction  and  Canto  I,   with 
Preface  and  Notes  by  W.  MINTO,  M.A.         ....    Paper  covers,  6d. 


PBENCH  AND  ITALIAN. 

Brachet.  Etymological  Dictionary  of  the  French  Language,  with 
a  Preface  on  the  Principles  of  French  Etymology.  Translated  into  English  by 
G.  W.  KITCHIN,  D.D.,  Dean  of  Winchester.  Third  Edition. 

Crown  8vo.  7*.  6d. 

Brachet.  Historical  Grammar  of  the  French  Language.  Translated 
into  English  by  G.  W.  KITCHIN,  D.D.  Fourth  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  dd. 

Saintsbury.  Primer  of  French  Literature.  By  GEORGE  SAINTS- 
BURY,  M.A.  Second  Edition. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Saintsbury.  Short  History  of  French  Literature.  By  the  same 
Author Crown  8vo.  los.  &d. 

Saintsbury.    Specimens  of  French  Literature.      .        .    Crown  8vo.  9*. 


LIST  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS.  II 

Beaumarchais.  Le  Bar  bier  de  Seville.  With  Introduction  and  Notes 
by  AUSTIN  DOBSON. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Blotiet.  D£loquence  de  la  Chaire  et  de  la  Tribune  Francises. 
Edited  by  PAUL  BLOUET,  B.A.  (Univ.  Gallic.)  Vol.  I.  French  Sacred  Oratory. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  25. 6d, 

Corneille.  Horace.  With  Introduction  and  Notes  by  GEORGE 
SAINTSBURY,  M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Corneille.   Cinna.  With  Notes,  Glossary,  etc.   By  GUSTAVE  MASSON, 

B.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.   stiff  covers,  is.  6d.   cloth,  zs, 

Gantier  (Theophile).  Scenes  of  Travel.  Selected  and  Edited  by 
G.  SAINTSBURY,  MA. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Masson.  Louis  XIV  and  his  Contemporaries ;  as  described  in  Ex- 
tracts from  the  best  Memoirs  of  the  Seventeenth  Century.  With  English  Notes, 
Genealogical  Tables,  &c.  By  GUSTAVE  MASSON,  B.A.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2$.  6d. 

Moliere.  Les  Precieuses  Ridicules.  With  Introduction  and  Notes  by 
ANDREW  LANG,  M.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  is.  6d. 

Moliere.  Les  Femmes  Savantes.  With  Notes,  Glossary,  etc.  By 
GUSTAVE  MASSON,  B.A.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff  covers,  is.  6d.  cloth,  zs. 

Moliere.    Les  Fourberies  de  Scapin.  \  With  Voltaire's  Life  of  Moliere.     By 

Baotne.     Athalie.  {     "us™-  M£5°ra\^vo. ,,  u. 

Moliere.  Les  Fourberies  de  Scapin.  With  Voltaire's  Life  of  Moliere. 
By  GUSTAVE  MASSON,  B.A.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff-  covers,  is.  6d. 

Musset.  On  ne  badine  pas  avec  f  Amour,  and  Fantasia.  With 
Introduction,  Notes,  etc.,  by  WALTER  HERRIES  POLLOCK.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 


NOVELETTES  :— 

Xavier  de  Maistre.    Voyage  autour  de  ma  Chambre.  \ 
Madame  de  Duras.     Ourika.  By    GUSTAVE 

Erckmann-Chatrian.Z*  Vieux  Tailleur.  yl>T°Editio2 

Alfred  de  Vigny.       La  Veillee  de  Vincennes.  [Ext.  fcap. 8vo. 

Edmoud  About.         LesJumeauxdeVHdtelCorneille.\zs.  6d. 
Bodolphe  Topffer.     Mesaventures  d'un  £colier.        ) 
Voyage  autour  de  ma  Chambre,  separately,  limp,  is.  6d. 


Perrault.     Popular    Tales.     Edited,  with  an   Introduction  on  Fairy 
Tales,  etc  ,  by  ANDREW  LANG,  M.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  5*.  dd. 

Quinet.    Lettres  d  sa  Mere.    Edited  by  G.  SAINTSBURY,  M.A. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Racine.  Esther.  Edited  by  G.  SAINTSBURY,  M.A.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2 s. 
Bacine.  Andromaque.  )  w£h  Louis  Racine's  Life  of  his  Father.  By 
Corneille.  Le  Menteur.  \  — B  MASSON«  B'A'  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  25.  * 

Reg'nard.       .          .         .    Le  foueur.          )  By  GUSTAVE  MASSON,  B.A. 
Brueys  and  Palaprat.    Le  Grandeur.     \    '       Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6^. 


12  CLARENDON  PRESS 

Sainte-Benve.  Selections  from  the  Cauteries  du  Lundi.  Edited  by 
G.  SAINTSBURY,  M.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

Se"vign6.  Selections  from  the  Correspondence  of  Madame  de  S6vign6 
and  her  chief  Contemporaries.  Intended  more  especially  for  Girls'  Schools.  By 
GUSTAVE  MASSON,  B.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35. 

Voltaire.  Merope.   Edited  by  G.  SAINTSBDRY,  M.A.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2*. 


Dante.    Selections  from  the  '  Inferno?    With  Introduction  and  Notes, 
by  H.  B.  COTTERILL,  B.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*.  6d. 

Tasso.    La  Gerusalemme  Liberata.    Cantos  i,  ii.    With  Introduction 
and  Notes,  by  the  same  Editor Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 


GERMAN,    GOTHIC,    ICELANDIC,    &c. 

Bnchheim.  Modern  German  Reader.  A  Graduated  Collection  of 
Extracts  in  Prose  and  Poetry  from  Modern  German  writers.  Edited  by  C.  A. 
BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc. 

Part  I.     With  English  Notes,  a  Grammatical  Appendix,   and  a  complete 
Vocabulary.     Fmtrth  Edition.          ,        .        .          Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 
Part  II.     With  English  Notes  and  an  Index.    Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 
Part  III.     In  preparation. 

Lange.  The  Germans  at  Home  ;  a  Practical  Introduction  to  German 
Conversation,  with  an  Appendix  containing  the  Essentials  of  German  Grammar. 
By  HERMANN  LANGE.  Third  Edition 8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Lang-e.  The  German  Manual;  a  German  Grammar,  a  Reading 
Book,  and  a  Handbook  of  German  Conversation.  By  the  same  Author. 

8vo.  7$.  (>d. 

Lange.  A  Grammar  of  the  German  Language,  being  a  reprint  of  the 
Grammar  contained  in  The  German  Manual.  By  the  same  Author.  8vo.  31.  6</. 

Lange.  German  Composition  ;  a  Theoretical  and  Practical  Guide  to 
the  Art  of  Translating  English  Prose  into  German.  By  the  same  Author. 

Second  Edition 8vo.  45.  6d. 

[A  Key  in  Preparation.] 

Lange.  German  Spelling  :  A  Synopsis  of  the  Changes  which  it  has 
undergone  through  the  Government  Regulations  of  1880  .  Paper  cover,  dd. 


Becker's  Friedrich  der  Grosse.  With  an  Historical  Sketch 
of  the  Rise  of  Prussia  and  of  the  Times  of  Frederick  the  Great.  With  Map. 
Edited  by  C.  A.  BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d. 

Goethe.  Egmont.  With  a  Life  of  Goethe,  etc.  Edited  by  C.  A. 
BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  Third  Edition.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*. 

Goethe.  Iphigenie  auf  Tauris.  A  Drama.  With  a  Critical  Intro- 
duction and  Notes.  Edited  by  C.  A.  BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3* . 

Heine's  Harzreise.  With  a  Life  of  Heine,  etc.  Edited  by  C.  A. 
BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  stiff  covers,  is.  €>d.  cloth,  zs.  6d. 


LIST  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS.  13 

Heine's  Prosa,  being  Selections  from  his  Prose  Works.  Edited  with 
English  Notes,  etc.,  by  C.  A.  BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4$.  6d. 

iessing.    Laokoon.  With  Introduction,  Notes,  etc.    By  A.  HAMANN, 

Phil.  Doc.,  M.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*.  fxl. 

Lessing.  Minna  von  Barnhelm.  A  Comedy.  With  a  Life  of 
Lessing,  Critical  Analysis,  Complete  Commentary,  etc.  Edited  by  C.  A. 
BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  Fifth  Edition.  .  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  3*.  €>d. 

Leasing-.  Nathan  der  Weise.  With  English  Notes,  etc.  Edited  by 
C.  A.  BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  Second  Edition.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*.  6d. 

Niebnhr's  Griechische  Heroen-Geschichten.  Tales  of  Greek  Heroes. 
Edited  with  English  Notes  and  a  Vocabulary,  by  EMMA  S.  BUCHHEIM. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  cloth,  zs. 

Schiller's  Historische  Skizzen: — Egmonts  Leben  und  Tod,  and  Bela- 
gerung  von  Antwerpen.  Edited  by  C.  A.  BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  Third 
Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged,  with  a  Map.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2$.  6d. 

Schiller.  Wilhelm  Tell.  With  a  Life  of  Schiller ;  an  Historical  and 
Critical  Introduction,  Arguments,  a  Complete  Commentary,  and  Map.  Edited 
by  C.  A.  BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc.  Sixth  Edition.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d. 

Schiller.  Wilhelm  Tell.  Edited  by  C.  A.  BUCHHEIM,  Phil.  Doc. 
School  Edition.  With  Map Extra  fcap.  8vo.  25. 

Schiller.  Wilhelm  Tell.  Translated  into  English  Verse  by  E. 
MASSIE,  M.A Extra  fcap.  8vo.  5$. 

Schiller.  Die  Jungfrau  von  Orleans.  Edited  by  C.  A.  BUCHHEIM, 
Phil.  Doc.  [In  preparation.} 


Scherer.  A  History  of  German  Literature.  By  W.  SCHERER. 
Translated  from  the  Third  German  Edition  by  Mrs.  F.  CONYBEARE.  Edited 
by  F.  MAX  MULLER.  2  vols. 8vo.  zis. 

Max  Muller.  The  German  Classics  from  the  Fourth  to  the  Nineteenth 
Century.  With  Biographical  Notices,  Translations  into  Modern  German,  and 
Notes,  by  F.  MAX  MULLER,  M.A,  A  New  edition,  revised,  enlarged,  and 
adapted  to  WILHELM  SCHERER'S  History  oj  German  Literature,  by  F. 

LlCHTENSTEIN.      2  VQls CrOWH  8VO.  215. 

Wright.  An  Old  High  German  Primer.  With  Grammar,  Notes, 
and  Glossary.  By  JOSEPH  WRIGHT,  Ph.D.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  $s.  6d. 

Wright.  A  Middle  High  German  Primer.  With  Grammar,  Notes, 
and  Glossary.  By  JOSEPH  WRIGHT,  Ph.  D.  .  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d. 


Skeat.  The  Gospel  of  St.  Mark  in  Gothic.  Edited  by  W.  W.  SKEAT, 
Litt.  D Extra  fcap.  8vo.  4*. 

Sweet.  An  Icelandic  Primer,  with  Grammar,  Notes,  and  Glossary. 
By  HENRY  SWEET,  M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  35.  6d. 

Vigfasson  and  Powell.  An  Icelandic  Prose  Reader,  with  Notes, 
Grammar,  and  Glossary.  By  GUDBRAND  VIGFUSSON,  M.A.,  and  F.  YORK 
POWELL,  M.A. Extra  fcap.  8vo.  ios.  6d. 


14  CLARENDON  PRESS 


MATHEMATICS  ABTD  PHYSICAL  SCIENCE. 

Aldis.  A  Text  Book  of  Algebra  (with  Answers  to  the  Examples'].  By 
W.  STEADMAN  ALDIS,  M.A Crown  8vo.  7$.  6d. 

Hamilton  and  BaU.  Book-keeping.  By  Sir  R.  G.  C.  HAMILTON, 
K.C.B.,  and  JOHN  BALL  (of  the  firm  of  Quilter,  Ball,  &  Co.).  New  and 

Enlarged  Edition Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs. 

***  Ruled  Exercise  Books  adapted  to  the  above.     (Fcap.  folio,  2*.) 

Hensley.  Figures  made  Easy  :  a  first  Arithmetic  Book.  By  LEWIS 
HENSLKY,  M.A. Crown  8vo.  6d. 

Hensley.  Answers  to  the  Examples  in  Figures  made  Easy,  together 
with  2000  additional  Examples  formed  from  the  Tables  in  the  same,  with 
Answers.  By  the  same  Author.  ......  Crown  8vo.  is. 

Hensley.     The  Scholars' Arithmetic.    By  the  same  Author. 

CroWn  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Hensley.  Answers  to  the  Examples  in  the  Scholar's  Arithmetic. 
By  the  same  Author. Crown  8vo.  is.  6d. 

Hensley.  The  Scholar's  Algebra.  An  Introductory  work  on  Algebra. 
By  the  same  Author Crown  8vo.  zs.  6d. 


Baynes.  Lessons  on  Thermodynamics.  By  R.  E.  BAYNES,  M.A., 
Lee's  Reader  in  Physics.  .  .  ...  .  .  Crown  8vo.  js.  f>d. 

Donkin.    Acoustics.   By  W.F.DoNKiN,  M.A.,  F.R.S.    Second  Edition. 

Crown  8vo.  js.  6d. 

Euclid  Revised.  Containing  the  essentials  of  the  Elements  of  Plane 
Geometry  as  given  by  Euclid  in  his  First  Six  Books.  Edited  by  R.  C.  J.  NIXON, 
M.A ,  Crown  8vo. 

May  likewise  be  had  in  parts  as  follows: — 
Book  I,  «.         Books  I,  II,  is.  6d.        Books  I-IV,  '3*.        Books  V-IV,  3s. 

Euclid.  Geometry  in  Space.  Containing  parts  of  Euclid's  Eleventh 
and  Twelfth  Books.  By  the  same  Editor.  .  .  .  Crown  8vo.  3$.  6d. 

Harconrt  and  Madan.  Exercises  in  Practical  Chemistry.  Vol.  I. 
Elementary  Exercises.  By  A.  G.  VERNON  HARCOURT,  M.A.  :  and  H.  G. 
MADAN,  M.A.  Fourth  Edition.  Revised  by  H.  G.  Madan,  M.A. 

Crown  8vo.  ios.  6d. 

Madan.  Tables  of  Qualitative  Analysts.  Arranged  by  H.  G.  MADAN, 
M.A Large  410.  41.  6d. 

Maxwell.  An  Elementary  Treatise  on  Electricity.  By  J.  CLERK 
MAXWELL,  M.A.,  F.R.S.  Edited  by  W.  GARNETT,  M.A.  Demy  8vo.  js.  6d. 

Stewart.  A  Treatise  on  Heat,  with  numerous  Woodcuts  and  Dia- 
grams. By  BALFOUR  STEWART,  LL.D.,  F.R.S.,  Professor  of  Natural  Philosophy 
in  Owens  College,  Manchester.  Fifth  Edition.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  7*.  €>d. 


LIST  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS.  15 

Williamson.  Chemistry  for  Students.  By  A.  W.  WILLIAMSON, 
Phil.  Doc.,  F.R.S.,  Professor  of  Chemistry,  University  College  London.  A  new 
Edition  with  Solutions.  • Extra  fcap.  8vo.  8s.  6d. 


Combination  Chemical  labels.    In  two  Parts,  gnmmed  ready  for  rise. 
Part  I,  Basic  Radicles  and  Names  of  Elements.      Part  II,  Acid   Radicles. 

Price  3*.  6d. 


HISTORY,    POLITICAL    ECONOMY, 
GEOGRAPHY,    &c. 

Danson.    The  Wealth  of  Households.    By  J.  T.  DANSON.    Cr.  8vo.  5*. 

Freeman.  A  Short  History  of  the  Norman  Conquest  of  England. 
By  E.  A.  FREEMAN,  M.A.  Second  Edition.  .  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

George.  Genealogical  Tables  illustrative  of  Modern  History.  By 
H.  B.  GEORGE,  M.A.  Third  Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged.  Small  410.  125. 

Hughes  ( Alfred).  Geography  for  Schools.  Parti,  Practical  Geography. 
With  Diagrams Extra  fcap.  8vo.  2*.  6d. 

Kitchin.     A  History  of  France.     With  Numerous  Maps,  Plans,  and 
Tables.     By  G.  W.  KITCHIN,  D.D.,  Dean  of  Winchester.    Second  Edition. 
.Vol.  I.  To  1453.     Vol.  II.  1453-1624.     Vol.  III.  1624-1793.    each  los.  6d. 

Lucas.  Introduction  to  a  Historical  Geography  of  the  British  Colonies. 
By  C.  P.  LUCAS,  B.A.  .  .  .  Crown  8vo.,  with  8  maps,  45.  6d. 

Sawlinson.  A  Manual  of  Ancient  History.  By  G.  RAWLINSON, 
M.A.,  Camden  Professor  of  Ancient  History.  Second  Edition.  Demy  8vo.  141. 

Rogers.  A  Manual  of  Political  Economy,  for  the  use  of  Schools. 
By  J.  E.  THOROLD  ROGERS,  M.A.  Third  Edition.  Extra  fcap.  8vo.  45.  6d. 

Stub  IDS.  The  Constitutional  History  of  England,  in  its  Origin  and 
Development.  By  WILLIAM  STUBBS,  D.D.,  Lord  Bishop  of  Chester.  Three 
vols.  ..........  Crown  8vo.  each  12$, 

Stubbs.  Select  Charters  and  other  Illustrations  of  English  Con- 
stitutional History,  from  the  Earliest  Times  to  the  Reign  of  Edward  I. 
Arranged  and  edited  by  W.  STUBBS,  D.D.  Fourth  Edition.  Crown  8vo.  &s.  6d. 

Stubbs.     Magna  Carta :  a  careful  reprint.        .       .       .    410.  stitched,  is. 


ART. 

Hullah.     The  Cultivation  of  the  Speaking  Voice.    By  JOHN  HULLAH. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Maclaren.  A  System  of  Physical  Education :  Theoretical  and  Prac- 
tical. With  346  Illustrations  drawn  by  A.  MACDONALD,  of  the  Oxford  School  of 
Art.  By  ARCHIBALD  MACLAREN,  the  Gymnasium,  Oxford.  Second  Edition. 

Extra  fcap.  8vo.  75.  6d, 


1 6       CLAREND ON  PRESS  LIST  OF  SCHOOL  BOOKS. 

Trontbectc  and  Dale.  A  Music  Primer  for  Schools.  By  J.  TROUT- 
BECK,  D.D.,  formerly  Music  Master  in  Westminster  School,  and  R.  F.  DALE, 
M.A.,  B.  Mus.,  late  Assistant  Master  in  Westminster  School.  Crown  8vo.  is.  6d. 

Tyrwhitt.    A  Handbook  of  Pictorial  Art.     By  R.  St.  J.  TYRWHITT, 

M.A.     With  coloured  Illustrations,  Photographs,  and  a  chapter  on  Perspective, 
by  A.  MACDONALD.     Second  Edition.      .        .        .         8vo.  half  morocco,  18*. 

Upcott.  An  Introduction  to  Greek  Sculpture.  By  L.  E.  UPCOTT, 
M.A. Crown  8vo.  45.  6d. 


Student's  Handbook  to  the  University  and  Colleges  of  Oxford. 
Ninth.  Edition Crown  8vo.  zs.  6d. 

Helps  to  the  Study  of  the  Bible,  taken  from  the  Oxford  Bible  for 
Teachers,  comprising  Summaries  of  the  several  Books,  with  copious  Explanatory 
Notes  and  Tables  illustrative  of  Scripture  History  and  the  Characteristics  of 
Bible  Lands ;  with  a  complete  Index  of  Subjects,  a  Concordance,  a  Dictionary 
of  Proper  Names,  and  a  series  of  Maps.  ....  Crown  8vo.  3$.  6rf. 


*5)5*  A  READING  ROOM  has  been  opened  at  the  CLARENDON  PRESS 
WAREHOUSE,  AMEN  CORNER,  -where  visitors  will  find  every  facility 
for  examining  old  and  new  works  issued  from  the  Press,  and  for 
consulting  all  official  publications. 


IFF  All  communications  relating  to  Books  included  in  this  List,  and 
offers  of  new  Books  and  new  Editions,  should  be  addressed  to 

THE  SECRETARY  TO  THE  DELEGATES, 
CLARENDON  PRESS, 

OXFORD. 


HontJOtt  :   HENRY  FROWDE, 
OXFORD  UNIVERSITY  PRESS  WAREHOUSE,  AMEN  CORNER. 

6  QUEEN  STREET. 
CLARENDON  PRESS  DEPOSITORY, 
116  HIGH  STREET. 


B 


•H 
-P 

cd 


o 

•P 


-P 

•  O 
CO     P 

•  T3 

&'  2 


o 

CQ 

,P 


•-1     LQ 

"-3  O 


University  of  Toronto 
Library 


DO  NOT 

REMOVE 

THE 

CARD 

FROM 

THIS 

POCKET 


Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 
LOWE-MARTIN  CO.  LIMITED